331
HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ WEEK: 1 Date of preparing: Date of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives : 1. Knowledge : - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: Greet and self- introduce. 2. Skills : - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus : - Sentence Partners: - Hello/ hi. I’m + name. - Vocabulary: hello, hi, I, am, nice to meet you. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization : - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test : - Check pupils’ books, note books …… 3. New lesson : Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Say hello to the class and introduce yourself, using Hello. I am + name. Walk around the class to say hello again to some pupils and ask them to answer. 1. Look, listen and repeat. Tell Ps that they are going to practice introducing themselves and Greeting Look at the picture and answer Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    0

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK: 1Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

Period 1: Unit 1: HELLOLesson 1(1, 2, 3)

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: Greet and self- introduce.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: - Hello/ hi. I’m + name.- Vocabulary: hello, hi, I, am, nice to meet you.II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Check pupils’ books, note books ……3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up

Say hello to the class and introduce yourself, using Hello. I am + name. Walk around the class to say hello again to some pupils and ask them to answer. 1. Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice introducing themselves and responding to the introduction. Point the first picture elicit the names of characters and what are they saying: Mai introduce herself to Nam and Nam introduce himself to Mai. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture.Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times2. Point and say. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying Hi/ hello. I’m + ten. And responding to greeting. Point to the first

Greeting

Look at the picture and answerThey are teacher and studentsThey are in the class

Listen and repeat after the teacher

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 2: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

picture and elicit the name to fill the gap. Put the sentence on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book.Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talk.Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture and check comprehension by pointing to and eliciting the name of each activity. Call a pair to give a demonstration of the dialogue before starting the activity.Have Ps work in pairs. Go around to offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary.Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class.

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Work in pairs

Individually work

Work in pairs

Do exercises. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

Period 2: UNIT 1: HELLOLesson 1: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: greeting and self-introduction. Listening comprehension and tick the picture. Write the missing words into the blanks2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 3: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up: Say hello to partner.

4. Listen and tick.Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Answer: 1.b 2.a5. Let’s write.Tell Ps that they are going fill the gaps with I’m and Hello. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback. Elicit the words filling the gaps. Get Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some pairs to read the text aloudAnswer: 1. Hello, I’m 2. I’m, Hello. 6. Let’s sing.Tell Ps that they are going to sing the Hello Song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions.Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and doing the actions.Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions.Have the whole sing the song and do the actions.

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Greeting

Listen and tick

Individually work

Work in pairs

Listen and sing

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 4: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK: 1Date of preparing:Date of teaching:

Period 3: UNIT 1: HELLOLesson 2: Part 1- 2-3

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to greet and respond to greeting2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: How are you? - I’m fine- Vocabulary: bye, goodbye, Thanks, And you? HowII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to greet to each other3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and introducing oneself.1.Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying and responding to Hi/hello. I/m +ten. How are you? Check understanding. Elicit the names of characters in each picture and explain what they say. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along.Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it for several times2. Point and say.

Answer the teacher’s questions

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeatRead in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 5: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying How are you? And replying Fine, thanks/thank you. Point to each picture and elicit his/her name. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the sentence on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book.Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3 - Let’s talk: Tell the class that they are going to practice more with their friends, using their own names. Draw Ps’ attention to the pictures and elicit the language that the characters might use. Elicit the words to fill in the gaps. Put the sentences on the board and do choral and individual repetition Have Ps work in pair to greet and respond to greeting.- Display the dialogue in front of the class, others comment 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look at 4 pictures

Point to the pictures and practise

Pair work

Work in pair practice talking

Do exercises in the workbook

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

Period 4: UNIT 1: HELLOLesson 2: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: Greet and respond to greeting. Listening comprehension to number the pictures and reading the dialogue to fill the given words into the blanks.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 6: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and introducing oneself.4. Listen and numberTell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Answer:1.d 2.c 3.b 4.a 5. Read and completeTell Ps that they are going to read and fill the gaps with the appropriate words. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to work in pairsGet Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some pairs to read the text.Answer: 1.Goodbye 2. Bye 3. Fine 4. thank you6. Let’s writeTell Ps that they are going to read and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some Ps to act out the dialogueAnswer: 1. How 2. I’m fine, thanks

Answer the teacher’s questions

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and number

Read three dialogues

Read in pairs

Individually work

Write the suitable words to fill in the blank

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 7: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, review the structure and the new words

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 2Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

Period 5: UNIT 1: HELLOLesson 3: Part 1-2-3

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: review greet and self-introduce. Greet and respond to greeting and self-introduction. Pronounce the sounds in the letters h, b correctly 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and responding to greeting.1. Listen and repeatTell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words and sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters b and h on the board and say them a few times. Ask sts to repeat after to the tape. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonic letters. Do choral repetition of the words and sentences until Ps feel confident.

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Listen and repeat

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 8: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

-Tell Ps to write the initial letters of the words and sentences or names of people in capital letters.Write similar letters for other words in the sentences. 2. Listen and writeTell ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence before starting the dictation.Have ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answer on the board for ps to copy down into their notebooksGet Ps to work in pairs and practice saying the sentences.Answer: 1. Bye 2.hello 3. Let’s chant.Tell Ps that they are going to say the Hello chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions.Divide the class into three groups to say the chant.Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary.Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole class claps along the rhythm 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Read 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 2Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

Period 6: UNIT 1: HELLOLesson 3: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: review greet and self-introduce, Greet and respond to greeting, and self-introduction. Reading comprehension then match and fill the suitable words to the blank.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 9: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant Hello4. Read and match.Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Do choral and individual repetition

Answers: 1 – d; 2 – a; 3 – b; 4 – c.4. Read and write.

Tell Ps that they are going to read and fill the gaps with the appropriate words. Check comprehension and give feedback. Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Do choral and individual repetition.Answer: 1. Hello 2. I’m 3. Nice 4. How 5. I’m fine/ Fine 6. Project- Introduce the name card.- Explain how to do the exercise: Make name cards and Present them to class. Give Ss time to do project in class. Ask Ss to work in Groups. Go around and

Read the chant Hello

Look at the sentences in the book

Read and work individually

Work in pairs

Whole class

Read then Write the suitable words in the blanksIndividual work

Pair work

Work in group

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 10: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

help Ss if necessary. Call several individuals to the front of the class to present their cards, using their name cards and saying Hello, I’m…Have Ps stick Their cards on the wall of the classroom4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, review the structure and the new words

Work individually

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 2Period 7: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s name.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: What’s your name? - My name’s Mai- Vocabulary: what, your, name, my, is=’s, are=’reII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing hello song1. Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to ask someone’s name. Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and what are they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture.Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 11: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

repeat it for several times2. Point and say- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary:What are=’reYour NameMy is=’scheck vocab: slap the boardModel sentence: What’s your name?-My name’s Mai.Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions What’s your name?-My name’s Mai. Point to each picture and elicit his/her name and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book.Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class 3 Let’s TalkTell the class that they are going to practice more with their friends. Point to Nam and Quan and Elicit what they say. Fill the gaps. Put the sentences on the board and do choral and individual repetition Have Ps work in pair to greet and respond to greeting.- Display the dialogue in front of the class, others comment4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words and structure

Look and find out the model sentences

Point the pictures and practise

Work Individually

Pactise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 8: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about one’s name. Listen comprehension and tick the picture they hear and write the suitable words into the blank2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 12: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up: Ask and answer questions about one’s name 4. Listen and tick.Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class Answer: 1.a 2. b5. Read and write.Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackElicit the words to fill in the gaps. Remind ps to erite the initial letter of the words at the beginning of each sentence in capital lettersGet Ps to swap and check their answers before asking different pairs to read the dialogue aloud. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Answers: 1. My name is 2. Mai/ my name is

6. Let’s singTell Ps that they are going to sing the The alphabet song song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions.Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing

Practise in pairs

Indentify the characters in each pictureListen and tick

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work in pairs

Listen and sing

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 13: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

and doing the actions.Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions.Have the whole sing the song and do the actions-

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Group work

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK: 3Period 9: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about how to spell one’s name.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: How do you spell your name? –L-I-N-D-A- Vocabulary: How, spellII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to greet to each other3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song1.Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to spell names Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and the activities. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Explain how to spell one namePlay the recording for Ps to listen and say along.2. Point and sayHave Ss look at the pictures on page 14

Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 14: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

repeat it for several times- Teach vocabulary:How spell- Elicits the structures How are do you spell your name? –L-I-N-D-A

Tell Ps that they are going to practice spelling names Point to each picture and elicit the names of characters and what each one says. Fill the bubble. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Do choral and individual repetition of the letter in focus before having Ps drill the spellingGet Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talkTell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture and check comprehension by pointing to and eliciting the name of each activity. Call a pair to give a demonstration of the dialogue before starting the activity.Have Ps work in pairs. Go around to offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary.Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class.If there is time, tell Ps to ask and answer questions about their own activities at break time 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words and structure

Read in pairs

Look at 4 pictures Point to the pictures and practise

Pair work

Work in pair practice talking:

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 3Period 10: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about how to spell one’s name. Listen comprehension and number the picture they hear. Read and match.

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 15: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting: T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to spell one’s name.4. Listen and numberTell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class Answer: 1.c 2.b 3.d 4.a5. Read and match.Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Do choral and individual repetition Answers: 1 – c; 2 – b; 3-a

6. Let’s writeTell Ps that they are going to read and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to look at the pictures and text. And read in silence. Tell Ps to give names to new characters in the picture. Ps fill the gapsGet Ps to swap and check their answers before calling

Practise in pairs

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and number

Pair work

Look at 3 pictures

Work Individually

Pair work

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 16: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

different pairs to read the answer aloud.Call a few Ps to read the dialogue in front of the class4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, review the structure andthe new words

Practise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 11: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: review asking and answering questions about one’s name, how to spell one’s name, make and respond to instructions. Pronounce the sounds in the letters m, p correctly.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to spell one’s name1.Listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters m and p on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do choral repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident2. Listen and write.Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Listen and repeat

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 17: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

few seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before starting the dictation.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences Answer: 1. Peter 2. Mai3. Let’s chant.Tell Ps that they are going to say the What’s your name? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions.Divide the class into three groups to say the chant.Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary.Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole class claps along the rhythm.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook

Read 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Group work

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 12: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s name, how to spell one’s name. read and comprehension to do the exercises given in the book2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 18: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant: What’s your name?- T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and responding to greeting.4. Read and match.Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Do choral and individual repetition

Answers: 1 – b; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – c.5. Read and complete.Tell Ps that they are going to read and fill the gaps with the appropriate words. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Do choral and individual repetitionAnswer: 1. my 2. Hi 3. How 4. What’s 5. name’s 6. ProjectTell Ps that they are going to collect the names of their classmates and write them on a sheet of paper. Allow Ps time to carry out the project in class.Call individual Ps to the front of the class to present the collected names and spell them. Finally , tell Ps to post their work on the walls of the classroom4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Read the sentences in the book

Read and Work individually

Work in pairs

Work individually

Fill the suitable words in the blanks

Pair work

Individually work

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 19: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 4.

Period 13: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce someone.2. Skills:- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: This is Tony- Vocabulary: ThisII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song1. Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice introducing someone, using This is + name. Elicit the names of the teacher and two children and what are they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture.Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times2. Point and say. Tell Ps that they are going practice introducing someone, using This is + name and responding to that

Sing the alphabet song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Individually work

Look and find out the model sentences

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 20: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

introduction. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book.Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talk.Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture and check comprehension by pointing to and eliciting the name of each activity. Call a pair to give a demonstration of the dialogue before starting the activity.Have Ps work in pairs. Go around to offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary.Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class.If there is time, tell Ps to ask and answer questions about their own activities at break time4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words and the new structure

Point the pictures and practise

Pactise in pair

Do exercises in the workbook

.Period 14: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.

Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce someone. Listening comprehension to tick the picture they hear and looking and writing2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 21: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils to ask and answer about the specific information.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up

Ask Ps to introduce someone4. Listen and tick.Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Answer: 1.a 2.b5. Read and write.Tell Ps that they are going to look at pictures and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloudAnswers: 1. This is / hello, Nam 2.This is/ hello, Phong

6. Let’s sing.Tell Ps that they are going to sing the How are you? song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions.Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and doing the actions.Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions.Have the whole sing the song and do the actions.

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework

S introduce someone

Indentify the characters in each pictureListen and tick

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work in pairs

Listen and sing

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 22: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Do exercises in the workbook. Review the new words and structures.

Do exercises in the Workbook

WEEK: 4Period 15: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Is that Tony?-Yes, it is/No, it isn’t- Vocabulary: that, yes, no, is not = isn’t, itII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to make and respond to instruction3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song1.Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to ask and answer questions about someone. Ps look at the first pictures and read the text. Point to the first picture and elicit what each character says. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along.Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it for several times2. Point and say.Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about someone, using Is that +

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Observe 4 pictures

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 23: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

name? Point to picture a and elicit the name of the character and what is said about him. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. Repeat the procedure with the other pictDo choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters.Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talkTell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture and check comprehension and elicit the words to fill the gaps. Put the question and answer on the board. Have Ps repeat them a few times.Have Ps work in pairs, using the character’ names in the book or their classmates’ name4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words and the new structure

Point to the pictures and practise

Practice in pairs

Work in pair practice talking:

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 4Period 16: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about someone. Listening comprehension to number the picture they hear and looking the picture reading questions and answering.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 24: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss do after T.

4. Listen and tick.Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Answer: 1.c 2.b 3.a 4.d

5. Look, read and answerTell Ps that they are going to look at pictures read and answer the questions. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloudAnswers: a. Is that Linda? – Yes, it is. b, Is that Peter? – No, it isn’t. It is Tom c, Is that Phong? – Yes, it is. d, Is that Linda? – No, it isn’t. It is Tom.

6. Let’s playTell Ps that they are going to play the line-up game. Explain to Ps how to play game and check understanding. Get two groups to demonstrate the game.Start the game and put the scores and correct sentences on the board.At the end of the game, have the class say congratulations to the winning group and read the sentences on the board.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, review the new words

Practise in pairs

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and number

Ps answer

Look 4 pictures

Work in pairs

Read the questions and answers in pairs

Practise in groups

Do exercises in the

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 25: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

and structure workbook

WEEK 5

Period 17: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: review asking and answering questions about someone, introducing someone. Pronounce the sounds in the letters t, y correctly.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to introduce someone1.Listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters t and y on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do choral repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident.2. Listen and write.Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Listen and repeat

Read 2 sentences

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 26: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

before starting the dictation.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences.3. Let’s chant.Tell Ps that they are going to say the Is that Nam? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions.Divide the class into three groups to say the chant.Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary.Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole class claps along the rhythm.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Listen and fill in the blanks

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 18: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: review asking and answering questions about someone, introducing someone. Reading comprehension and complete and looking the pictures reading sentences and writing- Develop Ss reading, writing skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 27: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone, introduce someone: 3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant Is that Nam?4. Read and complete.Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and complete the sentences. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text and look at the pictures. Check comprehension and elicit the words to fill the gaps then give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Do choral and individual repetition

Answers: 1 – this; 2 – hello; 3 – that; 4 – isn’t.5. Look, read and write.Tell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures, read and fill the gaps. Check comprehension and elicit the words to fill the gaps.Get Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Do choral and individual repetitionAnswer: 1. Mai 2. Nam 3. Phong 4. Linda 5.Peter 6. ProjectTell Ps that they are going to choose a friend and draw a picture of him or her. Check understanding. Get Ps to prepare the necessary school things to carry out the projectPs do, T goes around and help if necessary.Calls Ps to the front of the class to present their drawing. Ps work in Pairs, ask and answer about them, Using Is this…?.Have Ps put their drawing on the wall of classroom and conduct a poll for the best five drawing. Praise and give prizes.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, review the new words

Read chant

Observe the pictures.Read the sentences in the bookRead and Work individually

Work in pairs

Fill the suitable words in the blanks

Work individually

Work individually

Do exercises in the

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 28: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

and structures workbook

WEEK 5Period 19: UNIT 4: HOW ARE YOU?

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about someone.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Who’s that?- It’s Tony- Vocabulary: who, Mr, Miss, MrsII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone, introduce someone.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing how are you song1. Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about someone, using Who’s that?It’s….. Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and what are they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture.Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times2. Point and say. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions Who’s that? Point to each picture

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look and find out the model sentences

Point the pictures and

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 29: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

and elicit his/her name. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat the procedure with the second picture.Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking.Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talk.Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Point to each picture and elicit his/her name and the words to fill in the gaps. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few timesHave Ps work in pairs to act out the dialogue. Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class, correct the pronunciation, if necessary.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

practise

Pair work

Pair work

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 20: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU?Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about someone. Listening comprehension to tick the picture and reading the dialogue and write.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 30: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up: Jumped words

4. Listen and tick.Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Answer: 1.b 2.a5. Read and write.Tell Ps that they are going to read and complete the sentences. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloudAnswers: 1. Who 2.Who’s that?

6. Let’s write. Tell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures and read the text in silence. Check comprehension and elicit the words to fill the gaps.Give time for Ps to do the task.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class.Call a few pairs to read the answer. Answer: 1. It’s Tony 2. It’s Mary 3. It’s Peter 4. It’s Linda

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Work in pairs

Indentify the characters in each pictureListen and tick

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work in pairs

Work individually

Pair work

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 31: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK: 6Period 21: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU?

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone’s age.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: How old are you?- I’m eight years old.- Vocabulary: one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, How old, years oldII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about someone.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song1.Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to ask and answer about ages. Elicit the names of characters in the first picture and their ages. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Give feedback and check the new vocabulary.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along.Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it for several times2. Point and say.Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about ages. Point to each picture and elicit characters’ name and their ages and the words to fill the gaps. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times. teach

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Read in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 32: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Ps to count from 1 to ten before the drilling activityDo choral and individual repetition, using the names and ages.Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talkTell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture. Elicit the names of the characters and the words to fill the gaps. Put them on the board and do choral and individual repetition.Have Ps work in pairs acting as the characters in the book using their own names and ages Go around to offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary.Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Point to the pictures and practisePlay role and speak out.

Work in pair practice talking

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 6Period 22: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU?

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone’s age. Listening comprehension and writing, reading and tick.2. Skills- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 33: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Have pupils count from 1 to 10.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about someone4. Listen and tick.Tell Ps that they are going to listen to the recording and fill the gaps in the sentences. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture and read the text. Ask Ps to guess the age of each character and check as they listen to the recording.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Answer: 1.six 2.seven 3.eight 4.ten5. Read and tick.Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and correct the boxes. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension by eliciting the name and the age of each character. Get Ps to work in pairsGet Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class.Divide the class into 4 groups and get them to take turns to read aloud each character’s linesAnswers: 1 – 6; 2 – 8; 3-10; 4-10

6. Let’s sing.Tell Ps that they are going to sing the Let’s count from one to ten song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions.Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and doing the actions.Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions.Have the whole sing the song and do the actions.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework

Practise in pairs

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and fill the missing wordsPs answer

Look at 4 pictures

Work Individually

Read the dialogues in pairs

Sing the song

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 34: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 23: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU?Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age. Pronounce the sounds in the letters f, s correctly.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils count from one to ten.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age.1.Listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters f and s on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do choral repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident.2. Listen and write.Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before starting the dictation.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences.

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Listen and repeat

Read 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 35: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

3. Let’s chant.Tell Ps that they are going to say the How old are you? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions.Divide the class into three groups to say the chant.Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary.Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole class claps along the rhythm.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 24: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU?Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age. Listening comprehension to match the sentences. Reading comprehension and writing.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 36: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- T asks Ss to read chant How are you?4. Read and match.Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Do choral and individual repetition Key: 1.c 2.a 3.b5. Read and write.Tell Ps that they are going to read and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to look at the pictures. Elicit the names of each activity. Call a few Ps and elicit the words to fill in the gaps.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down.Do choral and individual repetition of the sentencesKey: 1. How old/ I’m 2. How old/ I’m/ years old6. Project.Tell Ps that they are going to interview four classmates to get their names and ages. Check understanding. Have a group of four Ps do a demonstration in front of the class before starting the activity.Give Ps time to interview in class by working in groups. Go around to offer help. Call several Ps to the front of the class to report their work. 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Read the chant

Look at the sentences in the book

Read and Work individually

Work in pairs

Observe and identify the characters

Read then Fill the suitable words in the blanks

Work in group

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 37: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 7Period 25: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: this is my friend Mary. - Vocabulary: friendII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing Let’s count from one to ten song1. Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to introduce their friends saying This is my friend + name. Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and what are they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture.Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times2. Point and say. Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying and responding to This is my friend + name. Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit his/her name. Put all the sentences on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeatLook and find out the model sentences

Point the pictures and practise

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 38: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Do choral and individual repetition, using characters’ names.Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talk.Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. point to each character and elicit the name and what he/ she says. Ask Ps to to fill the gaps in the bubblesHave Ps work in pairs or groups of three to practice the dialogue, using the names of the characters or their own names. Go around to offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary.Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words and structure

Pactise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 26: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to introduce one’s friend and respond to introduction. Listening comprehension to tick the picture they hear. Reading the dialogue and fill in the suitable words.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils introduce one’s friend and respond to instructions3. New lesson:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 39: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up : play game bingo

4. Listen and tick.Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Answer: 1.b 2.a 5. Read and write.Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloudAnswers: 1. This is / Hello 2. my friend/ Hello

6. Let’s sing.Tell Ps that they are going to sing the The more we are together song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions.Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and doing the actions.Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions.Have the whole sing the song and do the actions.

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Play game

Indentify the characters in each picture

Listen and tick

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work in pairs

Listen and sing

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 40: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK: 7Period 27: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about friends.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: they, they are=they’re, are not=aren’t- Vocabulary: Are they your friends? –Yes, they are/No, they aren’tII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to introduce one’s friend and respond to introduction.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song1.Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions Are they your friends? Point to the first picture and elicit the names of two boys and what the others children say. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Give feedback and check the new vocabulary.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along.Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it for several times2. Point and say.Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions Are they your friends? Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gaps. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look at 4 pictures Point to the pictures and practise

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 41: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

in the book.Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talkTell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture and read the text in silence. elicit the names of the characters and the words to fill the gaps. Put the question and answer on the board Do choral and individual repetition Have Ps work in pairs, using the characters’ or their own names. Go around to offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary.Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Play role and speak out.

Work in pair practice talking

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK7 Period 28: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about friends. Listening comprehension and number the pictures they hear. Reading comprehension and completing2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 42: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Have pupils ask and answer questions about friends.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Jumped words4. Listen and numberTell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Answer: 1.d 2.a 3.b 4.c5. Read and complete.Tell Ps that they are going to read and fill the gaps . Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Do choral repetition of the textAnswers: 1 – name; 2 – nine; 3 - and; 4 - friends

6. Write about your friends- Have pupils open their books to Page 33. Tell Ps that they are going to write about themselvesGive Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension then do writingGet Ps to swap and check their answers before calling them to read aloud their answers.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Practise in pairs

Look at the pictures in the bookListen and number

Ps answer

Look at 3 pictures

ork Individually

Read the dialogues in pairs

Work individually

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 43: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK: 8Period 29: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?

Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction, ask and answer questions about friends. Pronounce the sounds in the letters a, e correctly.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to spell one’s name1.Listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters a and e on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do choral repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident.2. Listen and write.Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before starting the dictation.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences.3. Let’s chant.

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Listen and repeat

Read 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 44: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Tell Ps that they are going to say the Who’s that? chant. Say the chant ?and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions.Divide the class into three groups to say the chant.Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary.Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole class claps along the rhythm.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 8Period 28: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?

Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to will be able to: introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction, ask and answer questions about friends. reading comprehension to match sentences and circle the correct words. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils will be able to: introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction, ask and answer questions about friends.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 45: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Warm up: Read the chant Who’s that?4. Read and match.Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Do choral and individual repetition

Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – b; 4 – a. 5. Circle the correct wordsTell Ps that they are going to read and circle the correct answers. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedback.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Write the correct answer on the board for Ps to copy down.Do choral and individual repetition of the correct sentencesAnswer: 1. friend 2. they 3. Peter and Mary 4. Yes 5. Aren’t6. ProjectTell Ps that they are going to find photos of their friends to stick on a poster. They are going to write This is+ name of the friend under each photo and present their posters to class.Give project as homework as Ps need time to find the photosIn the class, have Ps to stick their work on the walls of the classroom and give a presentation, using This is+ name of the friend.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, review the new words and structures

Read the chant

Look at the sentences in the book. Read and Work individually

Read and Work individuallyChoose the best answer to fill in the blanks

Work individually

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 31: REVIEW 1

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 46: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:- Perform their abilities in listening, reading identifying specific information, speaking and writing related to the topics from units 1-5, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Revisions.- Vocabulary: Revisions.II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:-Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit1 to unit 51.Listen an tickTell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Explain the answers and give the further support to Ps who got more than half of the answering wrong

Answers: 1 – b; 2 – a; 3 – a; 4 – b; 5- b2. Listen and numberTell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Explain the answers and give the further support to Ps who got more than half of the

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Give the identification

Listen and tick

Work individually

Listen and number

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 47: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

answering wrongrrrAnswer: 1.c 2.b 3.d 4.a3. Read and completeTell Ps that they are going to read the text and answer fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGive Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Do choral and individual repetition of the text.Answer: 1. Hello 2. name 3. friends 4. nine4. Read and matchTell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Get Ps to work in pairs act out the dialogue.Answer: 1.e 2. d 3. b 4.a 5. c5. Look and say.Tell Ps that they are going to do some dialogues. Give Ps a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check the comprehension and elicit the words to fill in the gaps and give feedbackGive Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to work in pairs act out the dialogue. Give the feedback and praise Ps who did well and encourage Ps to listen and make improvement.Key: a. Hello/ Hello Mary b. How are you/ And you?/ Fine, thanks c. How are you/ I’md. they your/ they are.5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, review the new words and structure

Work individually

Work individually

Work in pairs

Work in pair

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 48: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Period 32: SHORT STORYI. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: read, listen and understand a short story- Review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 1 - 5.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening and reading skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Revisions.- Vocabulary: Revisions.- Phonic: RevisionsII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: -Ps ask Ps some questions3. New lesson: Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit1 to unit 51. Read and Listen to the storyThis is the first of the four cartoons about Miu and Cat and chit and mouse. To help Ps get the idea of the story, simply let them read and listen to this episode. In later episodes, the initial task will be more challenging.Before listen, ask them to look at the pictures and ask them questions. (apart from the cat and mouse, what can you see? A chair, a door, a window, …)Ply the tape and let the Ps read and listen.2. Complete the conversationTell Ps that they are going to read and fill the gaps. Give them a few seconds to read the text in silence, and check their comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task.Ask Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class.Answer: 1. I’m 2. Are you 3. fine 4. Your 5. I’m 6. Meet 7. Do you spell3. Work in pairs. Have a similar conversation with

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Give the identification

Listen and answer T’s questions

Work in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 49: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

a partner. Use the names.Tell Ps that they are going to practice the dialogues, using their own namesAsk groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice the dialogue.Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue. Correct the pronunciation if necessary4. Match the questions with the answers- Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 38. Tell pupils that they are going to read the story to get the information in order to match the questions on the left to the answers on the right. Give them a few seconds to read the text and check comprehension.-Give Ps time to do the task.Ask Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class.Call a few pair to read the dialogue aloudAnswer: 1. c 2. a 3. d 4. b 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 1 - 5.

Work in pairs

Work individually

Work in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 50: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 9Period 36: UNIT 6: STAND UP!

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: give and respond to instructions.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: be quiet, don’t talk, come here, open your book, close your book, sit down, stand up- Vocabulary: be quiet, boy, sir, sorry, please, classII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils do the exercises.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing hello song1. Look, listen and repeat.Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 40 and what they are saying.Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mr loc and Ss give and respond to instructions.Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.Call on one pair. One repeats Mr Loc’s part, the other repeats Ss’ part.Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with the dialogue between Linda and Mai

2. Point, say and do actions- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 40. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary:Boy: Sir:Sorry Pleaseclass

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 51: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

check vocab: slap the boardModel sentence: be quiet = don’t talkcome here open your bookclose your book sit downstand up Check vocabulary: What and where- Model: Call some Ss request and the others do. Tell them that they are going to practice giving and acting out classroom instructions. Point to each instructions and check their comprehension. Demonstrate the action. Have Ps act out each instruction a few timesGet Ps to work in pairs, taking turns to say and act out the instructions. Check as a class3 Let’s TalkTell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at pictures. Elicit the word to fill in the gaps. Write the instructions on the board and get Ps to repeat them a few times.Get Ps to work in pairs, taking turns to say and act out the instructions. Correct their pronunciation if necessary. Call few pairs to perform the task in front of the class.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look and find out the model sentences

Point the pictures and practise

Pactise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 52: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 10Period 37: UNIT 6: STAND UP!

Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to make and respond to instructions. Listening comprehension and tick the picture they hear, and looking the pictures and writing the suitable words.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up Play game: Simon says

4. Listen and tick.Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Key: 1.a, 2,c 3, c5. Read and write.Tell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures and complete the sentences. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension. Give Ps time to do the task. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before writing the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some Ps to read sentences aloudAnswers: 1. Open 2. Quiet 3. Close

Play game

Indentify the characters in each pictureListen and tick

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 53: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

4. Sit 5. Come 6.Stand6. Let’s playPlay the game Simon says, following the procedure in the activities bank in the instruction. Have a group of six give a demonstration before starting the game.Get Ps to play the game in groups. Go around to offer help if necessary.

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Group work

Do exercises in the Workbook

WEEK: 10Period 38: UNIT 6: STAND UP!

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to Ask for and give permission2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: May I come in, Mr Loc? – Yes, you can May I go out, Mr Loc? – No you can’t- Vocabulary: speak, write, May I…, can, can’tII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to make and respond to instructions.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Play game: Simon says 1. Look, listen and repeat.

Sing the song

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 54: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking for permission using: May I…? Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters. Then explain what they say. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture.Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times2. Point and say. - Teach vocabulary:

Speak WriteMay I Cancan’t = can not

- Elicits the structures May I come in, Mr Loc? – Yes, you can May I go out, Mr Loc? – No you can’t

Tell Ps that they are going practice asking for permission using: May I…? Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Use the first picture as an example. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book.Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talk.Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture and check comprehension Ps say the words to fill the gaps. Write the question on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Have Ps work in pairs. Go around to offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary.Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look at 4 pictures

Point to the pictures and practice

Play role and speak out.

Work in pair practice talking:

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 55: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 10Period 39: UNIT 6: STAND UP!

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to Ask for and give permission. Listening comprehension and numbering the pictures they hear. Reading comprehension then matching. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils Ask for and give permission.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Order the words4. Listen and numberTell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Key: a.4 b.1 c.2 d.35. Read and match.Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before

Work individually

Look at the pictures in the bookListen and numberPs answer

Look at 3 pictures

Work Individually

Read the dialogues in

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 56: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

checking as class.Do choral and individual repetition Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3-a, 4-b

6. Let’s writeTell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures and complete the dialogues. Give Ps a few seconds to look at the pictures and read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Call four Ps to write their answers on the board. Then write the correct answers on the board to copy down into their notebooks.Call a few pairs to read the dialogue aloudAnswer: 1. Come in 2. Sit down 3 close my book 4. open my book4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

pairs

Individually work

Practise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 10Period 40: UNIT 6: STAND UP!

Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: give and respond to instructions, ask for and give permission. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /k/, /d/ correctly.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 57: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask for and give permission.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: jumped words1.Listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters c and d on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do choral repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident.2. Listen and write.Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before starting the dictation.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences.3. Let’s chant.Tell Ps that they are going to say the Come in and sit down chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions.Divide the class into three groups to say the chant.Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary.Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole class claps along the rhythm.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Work individually

Listen and repeat

Read 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 58: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 11.

Period 41: UNIT 6: STAND UP!Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: give and respond to instructions, ask for and give permission. Reading comprehension then matching. Reading comprehension then writing.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils give and respond to instructions, ask for and give permission.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the Come in and sit down song4. Read and match.Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Do choral and individual repetition

Answers: 1 – c; 2 – e; 3 – b; 4 – d, 5- a.5. Look, read and write.Tell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures, read the text and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around to offer help, if necessary.

Sing the song

Read the sentences in the bookRead and Work individually

Work in pairs

Fill the suitable words in the blanks

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 59: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloudAnswer: 1. sit 2. talk 3. Go out/ you can 4. go out/ you can’t6. Project.Tell Ps that they are going to write instructions they have learnt and put them in a box. Check understanding. Get Ps to prepare the necessary school things to carry out the project.Get Ps to writ the instructions in class in group work. Go around to offer help, if necessary.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Do the actions

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 11Period 42: UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: talk about school facilities2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: That’s my school. Is it big?-Yes, it is/No, it isn’t. It’s small.- Vocabulary: school, big, small, gym, library, computer room, playgroundII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask for and give permission, give and respond to instructions.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing Come on and sit down song Sing the song

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 60: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

1. Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to talk about school and school facilities. Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and what are they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture.Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times2. Point and say. Teach vocabulary:School Big Small GymLibrary computer room playground check vocab: slap the boardModel sentence: that’s the gymTell Ps that they are going to practice saying about school and school facilities. Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book. Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talk.Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture and check comprehension by pointing to and eliciting the name of each school facilities. Put the sentences on the board and do choral and individual repetition.Have Ps work in pairs. Go around offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary.Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class.If there is time, tell Ps to talk about their own school.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look and find out the model sentences

Point the pictures and practise

Pactise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 61: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 11Period 43: UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL

Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to talk about school facilities.Listening comprehension and tick the pictures they hear. Reading and writing the suitable words.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about school facilities.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up: Jumped words

4. Listen and tick.Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Key: 1.b 2.c 3.a5. Look, read and write.Tell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures, read the text and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloud

Do exercises

Indentify the characters in each pictureListen and tick

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work individually

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 62: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Answers: 1.class 2. Library 3. Computer room 4.gym

6. Let’s sing- Introduce The This is the way to go to school song, Page 13 Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions.Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and doing the actions.Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions.Have the whole sing the song and do the actions.

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Listen and sing

Do exercises in the book

WEEK 11Period 44: UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL.

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about school facilities2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Is your school big?- Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t. It’s small.- Vocabulary: new, old, large, small, II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to write the new words3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 63: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Warm up: Sing This is the way to go to school song1. Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering question about school facilities: Is the…..?Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and what are they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times2. Point and say. - Teach vocabulary:New Old Large small

Check vocab: what and where- Elicits the structures

Is your school big?- Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t. It’s smallTell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering question about school facilities: Is the…..? Point to each school facility and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book. Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talk.Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture and check comprehension by pointing to and eliciting the name of school facility and adj to fill the gaps. Put them on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class.If there is time, tell Ps to ask and answer questions about their own school.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look at 4 pictures

Point to the pictures and practise

Play role and speak out.Work in pair practice talking:

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 64: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 12Period 45: UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL.

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about school facilities. Listening comprehension to number the pictures they hear, then reading comprehension and circle the right words.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to make question and answer about school facilities.4. Listen and numberTell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Key a.3 b.1 c.4 d.25. Read and circle.Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and circle the correct words. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary.

Practise in pairs

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and number

Look at the pictures

Work Individually

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 65: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some Ps to read the sentences aloud Answers: 1 – big; 2 – small; 3-new; 4-big

6. Write about your school.- Have pupils open their books to Page 49. Tell pupils that they are going to write about their school. Ps read the text in silence check comprehension and give feedback then do the task.Ask Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Call 4 Ps to write their answers on the board4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Read the paragraph

Work individually

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 12Period 46: UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL.

Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: talk, ask and answer question about school facilities. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /g/, /l/ correctly.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 66: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to make question and answer about school facilities1. Listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters g and l on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do choral repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident.2. Listen and write.Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before starting the dictation.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences.3. Let’s chant.Tell Ps that they are going to say the Is your school new? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions.Divide the class into three groups to say the chant.Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary.Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole class claps along the rhythm.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Listen and repeat

Read 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 67: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 12Period 47: UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL.

Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: talk, ask and answer question about school facilities. Reading comprehension to match and complete the paragraph.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer about school facilities.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: - Ask Ss to read the chant.4. Read and match.Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Do choral and individual repetition

Answers: 1 – d; 2 – c; 3 – a; 4 – b.5. Read and complete.Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the

Ps read the chant

Read the sentences in the bookRead and Work individually

Work in pairs

Fill the suitable words in the blanks

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 68: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloud Answer: 1. playground 2. It 3. Gym 4. Classroom 5. nice 6. Project- Tell Ps that they are going to write the names of the rooms in school. Check Ps understanding and get Ps to prepare necessary school things.Give Ps time to do project in groups. Go around offer help, if necessary.Call some Ps to the front of the class to present their labels. EX: This is the gym4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Work individually

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 12Period 48: UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN.

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify school things.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: This/That is my pen.- Vocabulary: pen, rubber=eraser, pencil, pencil case=pencil box, school bag, notebook, book, pencil sharpenerII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer about school things3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant1. Look, listen and repeat.

Read the chant

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 69: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Tell Ps that they are going to practice talking about school things using This/That is….. Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and what are they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture.Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times2. Point and say.

Teach vocabulary:Pen rubber=eraserPencil pencil case=pencil boxschool bag notebook bookpencil sharpenercheck vocab: rub out and rememberModel sentence: This/That is my penTell Ps that they are going to practice talking about school things using This/That is….. Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book. Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talk.Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture and check comprehension by pointing to and eliciting the words to fill the gaps. Get Ps to repeat them a few times.Have Ps to practice the dialogue. Go around offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary.Call a few Ps to act out the dialogue in front of the class.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look and find out the model sentences

Point the pictures and practise

Pactise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 70: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 13Period 49: UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN

Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify school things. Listening comprehension to tick pictures they hear and reading comprehension to write the suitable words.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up

Talk about school things Ss have4. Listen and tick.Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Key: 1.b 2.c 3.a5. Look, read and write.Tell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures, read the sentences and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to look and read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to

Pair work

Indentify the characters in each picture

Listen and tick

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work individually

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 71: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

copy down their notebooks.Call some Ps to read the sentences aloudAnswers: 1. Ruler/is 2. pen/It is

6. Let’s play- Introduce the game Slap the board to pupils. Put the cards of school things on the board and elicit the word for each object.- Call two teams of four to the board and start the game.- Put the scores of the groups on the board

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Play game

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK: 13Period 50: UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN.

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about school things.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: These/Those are my books- Vocabulary: notebooks, pens, pencil cases, rubbers, books, pencils (plural nouns)II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to talk about school things3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Jumped words1. Look, listen and repeat.

Sing the song

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 72: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Tell Ps that they are going to talk about school things These/ Those are my books. Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and the activities. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Give feedback and check the new vocabulary.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along.Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it for several times2. Point and say.- Teach grammar:Most singular nouns + s => plural nouns

Ex: books/ notebooks/ pencils/ pens/ pencil cases/ rubbersNotes: how to pronounce plural nouns- Elicits the structures: These/ Those are my books.

Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying about school things These/ Those are my books. Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the sentence on the board. Have Ps to read it a few times.Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book or objects in the classroom.Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talkTell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture and check comprehension by eliciting the words for school things in the pictures. Get Ps to talk about School things, using pictures or objects in classroom.Call difference groups to act out the dialogue in front of the class. Correct the pronunciation, if necessary.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words and structures

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look at 4 pictures Point to the pictures and practise

Practice talking individually

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 73: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK: 13Period 51: UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN.

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about school things. Listening comprehension to number the pictures they hear, and reading comprehension to write the suitable words.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: desk, school bag, nice, school things, new, old, too, tableII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to talk about their school things.4. Listen and numberTell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Key a.3 b.4 c.2 d.15. Read and write.Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and complete the sentences about Nam and his school things. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before

Practise individually

Look at the pictures in the bookListen and number

Look at the picture

Work Individually

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 74: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some Ps to read questions and answersAnswers: 1. name; 2. Small/ nice; 3. School bag; 4. books/ notebooks; 5. Pencil cases/ pens

6. Let’s writeTell Ps that they are going to look at the pictures and fill the blanks. Give Ps time to read the text in silence Check comprehension and give feedback.Get Ps to do the task in pairs. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Key: 1. are/ books/ pens 2. Are/ pencils/ rulers4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Read the paragraph

Practise individually

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK: 13Period 52: UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN.

Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify and talk about school things. Pronounce the sounds in the letters r, th correctly.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the school things in plural

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 75: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

3. New lessonTeacher’s actions Students’ actions

Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to talk about school things1. Listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters r and th on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident.2. Listen and write.Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before starting the dictation.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences.Keys: ruler3. Let’s chant.Tell Ps that they are going to say the Look! Look! Look! chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions.Divide the class into three groups to say the chant.Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary.Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole class claps along the rhythm.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Ask ps to practice

Listen and repeat

Read 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 76: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK: 14.

Period 53: UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN.Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps identify and talk about school things. Reading comprehension to do the exercises.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about school things they have.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: read the chant4. Read and match.Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.

Do choral and individual repetition Answers: 1 – b; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – c.

5. Read and write.Tell Ps that they are going to read and fill the gaps with the appropriate words. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary.

Ask ps to read the chant

Read the sentences in the bookRead and Work individually

Work in pairs

Fill the suitable words in the blanks

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 77: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some Ps to read questions and answersDo choral and individual repetition.Answer: 1. name 2. This is 3. Those are/ pencils/ books 4. that’s 5. Those 6. Project- Tell Ps that they are going to draw the school things and color them, write two school things. Present them to the class. Check understanding and get Ps to prepare the school things.- Call several Ps to the front of the class to present their work.4. ConsolidationSummary the lesson5. Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Work individually

Work individually

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 14Period 54: UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT?

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about school things.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Is this your school bag? – Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t- Vocabulary:II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about school things.3. New lesson

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 78: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: read the chant1. Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to ask and answer questions about school things Is that/ this your…? Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and what are they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture.Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times2. Point and say. Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions : Is this your school bag? – Yes, it is. Is that your pen? – No, it isn’t Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book.Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talk.Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture and check comprehension by pointing to and elicit words about the school things. Call a pair to give a demonstration of the dialogue before starting the activity.Have Ps work in pairs. Go around offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary.Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words and structures

Read the chant

Look the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look and find out the model sentences

Point the pictures and practise

Pactise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 79: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 14Period 55: UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT?

Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about school things. Listening comprehension to tick the pictures they hear and reading comprehension to write the suitable words.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading, and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about school things.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up

- Play chain game 4. Listen and tick.Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Key: 1.b 2.a 3.b5. Look, read and write.Tell Ps that they are going to read and answer questions about school things. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.

Play game

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work in pairs

Read and write

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 80: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Call some open pairs to do the dialogueAnswers: 1. pen/ it is 3. School bag/ it is 2. pencil case/ it isn’t 4. Book/ it is

6. Let’s write. Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to do the task. Check comprehension and give feedback.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call a few open pairs to act out the dialogue Answer: 1. School bag 2. school bag / it is 3. pencil case 4. Pencil case/ it isn’t

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook

Individually work

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 14Period 56: UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT?

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about colours.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: What colour is your box? – It’s red What colour are your pencils? – They’re green.- Vocabulary: colour, red, green, blue, white, yellow, brown, orangeII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 81: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about school things3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: talk about school things1. Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about colors, using What colour is your box? – It’s red What colour are your pencils? – They’re green Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and what they say. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Give feedback and check the new vocabulary.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along.Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it for several times2. Point and say.Have Ss look at the pictures on page 60- Teach vocabulary:

colour white Red yellowGreen brown Blue orangeElicits the structures What colour is your box? – It’s red What colour are your pencils? – They’re green Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about colors. Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book.Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talkTell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture and check comprehension by pointing to and eliciting the name of each school thing. Call a pair to give a demonstration of the dialogue before starting the activity.Have Ps work in pairs. Go around offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary.

Practice

Look at the pictures in the book

Look at 4 pictures

Point to the pictures and practise

Play role and speak out.

Work in pair practice talking:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 82: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class.4. ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words and structures Do exercises in the

workbook

WEEK 15Period 57: UNIT 2: WHAT COLOUR IS IT?

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to make question and answer about how to spell one’s name. Listening comprehension to number the pictures they hear, and reading comprehension to match.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to ask and answer about colour.4. Listen and numberTell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.

Practise in pairs

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and number

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 83: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Key a.3 b.2 c.4 d.15. Read and match.Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with the pictures on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Do choral and individual repetition Answers: 1 – b; 2 – d; 3-a; 4- e; 5-c

6. Let’s sing.Tell Ps that they are going to sing the My new pen song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions.Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and doing the actions.Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions.Have the whole sing the song and do the actions.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look at 3 pictures

Work Individually

Read the sentences then match

Sing the song

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 15Period 58: UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT?

Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about school things and colours. Pronounce the sounds in the letters m, p correctly .2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 84: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to make question and answer about colours1. Listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters i and o on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident.2. Listen and write.Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before starting the dictation.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences.Key: 1. It 2. orange3. Let’s chant.Tell Ps that they are going to say the What colour is it? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions.Divide the class into three groups to say the chant.Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary.Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole class claps along the rhythm.

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Listen and repeat

Read 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 85: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 15Period 59: UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT?

Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about school things and colours. Reading comprehension to do the exercises1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about colours.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: read the chant.4. Read and match.Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Do choral and individual repetition

Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – b.5. Read and complete.Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and fill the gaps. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if

Read the chant

Read the sentences in the bookRead and Work individually

Work in pairs

Fill the suitable words in the blanks

Work individually

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 86: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before writing on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks. Do choral and individual repetition Answer: 1. green 2. desk 3. They 4. pens 5. Colour 6. ProjectTell Ps that they are going to : color the rainbow and Talk about it’s colours with their classmates. Give Ps time to do project in class. Work in groups. Go around offer help, if necessary. Call individual P to the front of the class to present their rainbow.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Work in groups

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 15Period 60: UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAKTIME?

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about break-time activities.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: What do you do at break time? – I play badminton.- Vocabulary: do, at break time, play, badminton, football, basketball, chess, table tennisII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 87: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Warm –up: Read the chant What color is it?1. Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about break activities, using What do you do at break time? Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and what are they saying. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture.Do choral and individual repetition, pointing to the characters speaking.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along. Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeats it for several times2. Point and say. Teach vocabulary:Play at break timeBadminton footballBasketball chessTable tennis docheck vocab: what and whereModel sentence: What do you do at break time? I play football.Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions What do you do at break time? Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book.Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talk.Tell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture and check comprehension by pointing to and eliciting the name of each activity. Call a pair to give a demonstration of the dialogue before starting the activity.Have Ps work in pairs. Go around to offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary.Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class.If there is time, tell Ps to ask and answer questions

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look and find out the model sentences

Point the pictures and practise

Pactise in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 88: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

about their own activities at break time4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words and structures

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 16Period 61: UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME?

Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about break time activities. Listening comprehension to tick the pictures they hear and reading comprehension to write the suitable words2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm upPairs work Practice asking and answering

questions What do you do at break time?4. Listen and tick.Tell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Key: 1.b 2.b 3.a

Practise

Indentify the characters in each picture

Listen and tick

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 89: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

5. Read and write.Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some Ps to read the text and sentences aloudKey: 1.chess 2. Table tennis 3. badminton6. Write about you. Tell Ps that they are going to write about their activities at break time. Check comprehension and give feedback.Give time for Ps to do the task.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class.Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue or write their answers on the board.

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Work individually

Write the sentences individually

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 16Period 62: UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME?

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to express likes and dislikes.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Do you like badminton? – Yes, I do./ No, I don’t.- Vocabulary: like, let’s, now, skipping, skating, hide-and-seek, blind man’s bluffII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 90: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to write the new words3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Ask and answer questions about break time activities1. Look, listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions about activities they like playing at break time, using Do you like + activities? Draw Ps’ attention to the first picture and elicit the names of characters and the activities. Have Ps repeat the text a few times. Repeat the procedure with the second picture. Give feedback and check the new vocabulary.Play the recording for Ps to listen and say along.Have Ps to find out the new structure. Whole class repeat it for several times2. Point and say.- Teach vocabulary:Like let’sSkipping skatingHide-and-seek blind man’s bluff- Elicits the structures

Do you like badminton? – Yes, I do. Do you like hide- and- seek? - No, I don’tTell Ps that they are going to practice asking and answering questions Do you like + activities? Point to each picture and elicit the meaning of new words. Point to the first picture and elicit the word to fill the gap. Put the question and answer on the board and have Ps repeat them a few times.Do choral and individual repetition, using the pictures in the book.Get Ps to work in pairs. Check as a class.3. Let’s talkTell Ps that they are going to practice more with their friends. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the picture and check comprehension by pointing to and eliciting the name of each activity. Call a pair to give a

Practice in pairs

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look at 4 pictures

Point to the pictures and practise

Play role and speak out.

Work in pair practice

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 91: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

demonstration of the dialogue before starting the activity.Have Ps work in pairs. Go around offer help and correct the pronunciation, if necessary.Call a few pairs to act out the dialogue in front of the class.If there is time, tell Ps ask and answer questions about their own activities at break time4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words and structures

talking:

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 16Period 63: UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME?

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to express likes and dislikes. Listening comprehension to number the pictures they hear, and reading comprehension to write the suitable words.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to to express likes and dislikes. Practise individually

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 92: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

4. Listen and numberTell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Key a.4 b.2 c.1 d.35. Read and write.Tell Ps that they are going to read the text and answer the questions. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGet Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Call some Ps to read questions and answersAnswers: 1. They play table tennis.

2.They like chess. 3.They like badminton.6. Let’s sing.Tell Ps that they are going to sing the Hide – and - seek song. Read each line and check comprehension. Sing each line and have Ps repeat it. When Ps are familiar with the tune, ask them to sing and do the actions.Ask groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice singing and doing the actions.Call a group of five to sing the song and do the actions.Have the whole sing the song and do the actions.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look at the pictures in the bookListen and number

Read the paragraph

Work Individually

Sing the song

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 93: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 16Period 64: UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME?

Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about break time activities, express likes and dislikes. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /bl/, /sk/ correctly .2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils to write new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: sing Hide-and-seek song1. Listen and repeat.Tell Ps that they are going to practice saying the letters, words, sentences in the book. Put the phonics letters bl and sk on the board and say them a few times. Ask Ps to repeat after you. Prompt Ps to say the words and sentences, paying attention to the target phonics letters. Do chorally repetition of the words and sentences unit Ps feel confident.2. Listen and write.Tell Ps that they are going to do a dictation. Give Ps a few seconds Ps a few seconds to read the in the silence before starting the dictation.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Get Ps to work in pairs and practice saying sentences.Key: 1, blind’s man bluff 2. skating3. Let’s chant.Tell Ps that they are going to say the What do you do

- Sing the song

Listen and repeat

READ 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Ps listen to the tape and

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 94: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

at break time? chant. Say the chant and check comprehension. Have Ps repeat every line of the chant. When they are familiar with the rhythm, show them how to say the chant and do the actions.Divide the class into three groups to say the chant.Get groups of Ps to sit face to face and practice chanting and doing the actions. Get around and offer help, if necessary.Call two groups to the front of the class to chant. The whole class claps along the rhythm.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

chant

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 17Period 65: UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME?

Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about break time activities, express likes and dislikes. Reading comprehension to mach the sentences and writing2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant4. Read and match.

Read the chant

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 95: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Tell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Do choral and individual repetition

Answers: 1 – b; 2 – c; 3 – a; 4 – d.5. Write about you.Tell Ps that they are going to write themselves. Give Ps a few seconds to look at the pictures. Elicit the names of each activity. Call a few Ps and elicit the words to fill in the gaps.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Call a few Ps to read their sentences aloud6. Project.Tell Ps that they are going to play Bingo. Explain how the game is play. Read the words in the grids and check comprehension. Then start the game.

When the game is over, ask Ps to make sentences with the words crossed 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Read the sentences in the bookRead and Work individually

Work in pairs

Work individually

Work in group

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 17Period 66: REVIEW 2

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:- Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from units 6-10, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills.3. Language focus:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 96: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Sentence Partners: Revisions.- Vocabulary: Revisions.II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:-Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit1 to unit 5Warm up: Sing the Hide – and – seek song1.Listen an tickTell Ps that they are going to listen and tick the correct boxes. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Explain the answers and give the further support to Ps who got more than half of the answering wrongKey: 1.a 2.b 3.a 4.b 5.d2. Listen and numberTell Ps that they are going to listen and number the pictures. Give a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check comprehension and give feedback.Play the recording three times for Ps to listen, do the task and check their answers.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class. Explain the answers and give the further support to Ps who got more than half of the answering wrongKey a.3 b.4 c.1 d.23. Read and completeTell Ps that they are going to read the text and fill the gaps. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension and give feedbackGive Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Give the identification

Listen and tick

Give the identification

Listen and number

Work individually

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 97: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

necessary.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as a class. Write the correct answers on the board for Ps to copy down their notebooks.Do choral and individual repetition of the text.Key: 1.school 2. Playground 3. Room 5. Quan4. Read and matchTell Ps that they are going to read the sentences on the left and pair them with those on the right by drawing a line between them. Check understanding. Give Ps a few seconds to read the text in silence. Check comprehension.Give Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Get Ps to work in pairs act out the dialogue.5. Look and say.Tell Ps that they are going to do some dialogues. Give Ps a few seconds for Ps to look at the pictures. Check the comprehension and elicit the words to fill in the gaps and give feedbackGive Ps time to do the task. Go around offer help, if necessary. Get Ps to work in pairs act out the dialogue. Give the feedback and praise Ps who did well and encourage Ps to listen and make improvement.Key: a. I play football b Yes they are./ No, they aren’t. c. What colour are your pencils? d. May I open my book?4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Work in pairs

Pair works

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 98: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 17Period 67: SHORT STORY

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:- Review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 6 - 10.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening and reading skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Revisions.- Vocabulary: Revisions.- Phonic: RevisionsII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Do the exercises. Correct exercise.3. New lesson: Warm up: Review the structures they learnt from unit 6 to unit 10.1.Fill the gaps. Then listen and check.Before Ps read the story, ask them to look at the pictures and ask them questions:Are there many houses? What color are they? Get Ps to fill the gaps. Then ask them to practice the conversation in group of three. Play the recording three times for Ps to listn, check their answers and understand the story.Key: Hello/meet you/your/yes/chair2. Ask and answer the questionTell Ps that they are going to read and answer the questions. Give them a few seconds to read the questions and the story again. Tell them to underline the key words in the questions and find the answers in the story.Give Ps time to do the task.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Call a few pairs to read the questions and answer aloud.

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Give the identification

Listen and answer T’s questions

Work in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 99: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Key: 1.He’s white 2. No, he isn’t. He is black./He’s a black cat. 3. Maurice is red 4. It’s big./It’s a big mouse.3. Number the sentences. Then act out in pairs.Tell Ps that they are going to read and number the sentences in the correct order. Give them a few seconds to read the text.Give Ps time to do the task.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Call a few pairs to read the dialogue aloud. Answer: 1. Miu: Maurice, this is Chit.1. Chit: Please to meet you, Maurice2. Maurice: Please to meet you too3. Chit: Is this your house?4. Maurice: Yes, it is.5. Chit: It’s big!

6.Maurice: That’s right 4. Put the words in correct.Tell Ps that they are going to put the words in correct order to make sentences. Give them a few seconds to read the text.Give Ps time to do the task.Get Ps to swap and check their answers before checking as class.Call a few pairs to read the correct sentences aloud. Answer: 1. Is that your chair?

1. Do you like hide-and-seek?2. Pleased to meet you too.3. Let’s play hide – and – seek.4. Is this your house?

4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 6 - 10.

Work in group

Work individually

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 100: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 18

Period 70: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify family members.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Who’s that?- He’s my father./ She’s my mother.- Vocabulary: man, next to, him, father, mother, young, nice, sister, brother, grandmother, grandfather, he, sheII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils answer T’s questions.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting 1. Look, listen and repeat.Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 6 and what they are saying.Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and Mai identify family members.Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.Call on one pair. One repeats Linda’s part, the other repeats Mai’s part.Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation.

2. Point and say- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 6. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary:man next tofather motheryoung nicesister brother

Pair works

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 101: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

grandmother grandfather he shecheck vocab: slap the boardModel sentence: Who’s that? - He’s my father./ She’s my mother. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments.- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.3 Let’s TalkAsk students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act outCorrect their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look and find out the model sentences

Point the pictures and practise

Pactise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 102: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Period 71: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify family members.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: photo, woman, girl, boy, her, familyII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up

Ask and answer about Ss’ name 4. Listen and tick

- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 7 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5. Read and complete- Have pupils open their books to Page 7. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and who they are in the photo.Teach vocabulary:Photo womanGirl boyHer family

Greeting

Indentify the characters in each picture

Listen and tick

Indentify the characters in each picture

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 103: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Happy ofCheck vocab: what and where- Tell Ss that they are going look the photo and read the sentences to get information to write the missing words.- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments.Answers: 1. Father 2. Mother 3. brother- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text.Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.

6. Let’s sing- Introduce A happy family song, Page 7. - Play the recording and listen to A happy faamily song- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm.- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation.

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Work individually

Listen and sing

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 104: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK: 18Period 73: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about the ages of family members.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: How old is your brother? – He is seven.- Vocabulary: eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, seventeen, eighteen, nineteen, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety, one hundredII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to greet to each other3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing A happy family song

1. Look, Listen and repeat.Have Ss to look at the book at page 8.Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying.

Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrasesHave Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubblesPlay the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times.Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Linda’s part.Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation.- Teach vocabulary:

Eleven twelveThirteen fourteenFifteen seventeen

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Read in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 105: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Eighteen nineteenTwenty thirtyForty fiftySixty seventyEighty ninetyone hundredCheck vocab: rub out and remember- Elicits the structures How old is your brother? – He is seven

2. Point and sayHave Ss look at the pictures on page 8Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy and the girl to SsAsk them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures.Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments.Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.

3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Talk about the age of Nam’s familyHave Ps work in pair.- Display in class, others commentListen and correct.Have Ps practise 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look at 4 pictures

Point to the pictures and practise

Play role and speak out.

Work in pair practice talking:

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 106: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 18Period 74: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about the age of family members.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: picture, years oldII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils introduce their family members.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Talk about the age of family members.

4. Listen and number- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes.- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

1. Read and completeAsk Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 9.Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to fill the ages of

Practise in pairs

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and number

Ps answer

Look at 3 pictures

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 107: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Quan’s family members Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.)Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: Quan-10; His father-forty-four; His mother-thirty-nine; His brother-fourteen

6. Write about your family- Have pupils open their books to Page 9. Get Ss to answer the ages of their family members - Pupils practice in pairs and complete the dialogues.- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.- Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text.- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Work Individually

Read the paragraph

Practise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 19

Period 75: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify family members, talk about the ages of family members. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /br/, /gr/ correctly .2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 108: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils to talk about the ages of family members.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting: identify family members, talk about the ages of family members1. Listen and repeatPlay the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role.Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words brother and grandmother-Introduce the sounds /br/ and /gr/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer.+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation.2. Listen and write- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction.- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.Answer: 3. Let’s chant- Introduce the Chant.- Turn on the tape.

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look at 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 109: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.- Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action.- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 76: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify family members, talk about the ages of family members.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils identify family members, talk about the ages of family members.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant

4. Read and match.T introduces the topic “you are going to read the

questions to get the information in order to match the answers”.Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.)

Read the chant

Look at the sentences in the book

Read and Work individually

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 110: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen

and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of

the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus

to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: 1 – d; 2 – a; 3 – b; 4 – c.

5. Read and complete-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise-Ask students to look the photo of Linda’s family Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 11.read the paragraph in the book and fill the suitable words to complete the dialogue. Work individually to do the exercise then practice in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. family 2. father 3. mother 4. brother 5. sister 6. Project- Introduce the situation.- Explain how to do the exercise: draw their family. Tell the classmates about it-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Work in pairs

Fill the suitable words in the blanks

Work individually

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 19Period 77: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able rooms in the house.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: There is a living room.

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 111: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Vocabulary: house, garden, over there, kitchen, bathroom, bedroom, dining room, gardenII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant1. Look, listen and repeat.Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 12 and what they are saying.Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and Mai greet and introduce their names.Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.Call on one pair. One repeats Linda’s part, the other repeats Mai’s part.Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation.

2. Point and say- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary:House gardenover there kitchenbathroom bedroomdining room gardencheck vocab: slap the boardModel sentence: There is a living room. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of

Read the chant

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look and find out the model sentences

Point the pictures and practise

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 112: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments.- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.3 Let’s TalkAsk students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to identify the rooms in Nam’s house. Call some pairs to act outCorrect their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Pactise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 78: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to indentify rooms in the house.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: way, clean, early, in the morningII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up

Talk about their houses 4. Listen and tick

- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 13 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in

Ss practise

Indentify the characters

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 113: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5. Look and write- Have pupils open their books to Page 13. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying.- Tell Ss that they are going to look the pictures, read and get information to write the missing words in the sentences.- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments.Answers: 1. A house 2. A living room

3.a kitchen 4. Bedroom 5. a bathroom 6.a kitchen

- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text.Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.

6. Let’s sing- Introduce The way I clean my house song, Page 13. - Play the recording and listen to The song- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm.- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their

in each picture

Listen and tick

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work individually

Listen and sing

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 114: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

pronunciation.4.Consolidation

Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK: 20Period 79: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about house facilities.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Is there a fence?-Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t.- Vocabulary: fence, pond, gate, yard, fenceII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to greet to each other3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song

1.Look, Listen and repeat.Have Ss to look at the book at page 14.Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying.

Set the scene: we are going to learn new phraseHave Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 115: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times.Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Tony’s part and the other repeat Nam’s part.Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation.- Teach vocabulary:Fence pondGate yardfence- Elicits the structures Is there a fence?-Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t.

2. Point and sayHave Ss look at the pictures on page 14Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boys and the girl to SsAsk them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures.Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments.Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.

3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task.Have Ps work in pair to talk about Tony’s house- Display in class, others commentListen and correct.Have Ps practise 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Listen and repeat

Read in pairs

Look at 4 pictures

Point to the pictures and practise

Play role and speak out.

Work in pair practice talking:

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 116: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 20Period 80: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about house facilities.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: There is not a yard- Vocabulary: any, around, but, beautiful, in front of, tree, inII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students’ attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the song

4. Listen and number- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 15 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes.- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5.Read and completeAsk Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and number

Ps answer

Look at 4 pictures

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 117: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

page 15.Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph about Phong’s house facilities to get the information in order to fill the given words in the blanks.” Teach vocabulary: Any aroundBut beautifulin front of treein

Check vocab: what and whereModel sentence: There is not a yard Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the paragraph about Phong’s house facilities and fill the given words in the blanks.Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: 1. House; 2. Beautiful; 3. Tree; 4. Pond

6. Write about your house- Have pupils open their books to Page 15. Get Ss to read the questions and answer about their houses facilities.- Pupils practice in pairs to ask and answer questions about their houses.- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.- Ask Ss to talk about their houses.- Have the whole class listen and reinforce their pronunciation.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Work Individually

Read the paragraph and do the exercise

Practise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 21

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 118: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Period 81: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify rooms in the house, ask and answer questions about house facilities. Pronounce the sounds in the letters ch/ /, th/ / correctly.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: behindII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students’ attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up:- T asks Ss to make question and answer about houses1. Listen and repeatPlay the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role.Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words kitchen and bathroom-Introduce the sounds ch/ / and th/ / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer.+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation.2. Listen and write- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Listen and repeat

Look at 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 119: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction.- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.Answer: 3. Let’s chant- Introduce the Chant.- Turn on the tape.- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.- Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action.- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 21Period 82: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.

Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify rooms in the house, ask and answer questions about house facilities.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about their house facilities.

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 120: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

3. New lessonTeacher’s actions Students’ actions

Warm up: Read the chant.4. Read and write.

T introduces the topic “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to find the suitable words to fill in the blanks”.Ss look at Mai’s house and find the house facilities read the paragraph individually and check their answers. Ss do the task

Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen

and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of

the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus

to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: 1. house; 2. pond; 3. tree; 4. living.

5. Read again and write the answers-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise-Ask students to read the paragraph in part 4 in the book of page 17 and answer the questions.Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. No, it isn’t. 2. It is blue. 3. Yes, there is. 4. Yes, there is. 5. No, there isn’t 6. Project- Introduce the situation.- Explain how to do the exercise: Draw and colour their houses. Write the names of the rooms in the houses-Ss introduce their houses in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Read the chant

Read the paragraph in the book

Read and Work individually

Work in group

Read the paragraph and answer the questions in pairs

Work individually

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 121: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 21Period 83: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK?

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house.2. Skills:- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Where’s the book?-It’s here/there.- Vocabulary: Where, chair, poster, bed, picture, coat, ball, here, thereII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe their houses.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant

1. Look, listen and repeat.Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 18 and what they are saying.

Set the scene “you are going to listen to Peter and his mother ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house.Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.Call on one pair. One repeats Peter’s part, the other repeats his mother’s part.Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation.

2. Point and say- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary:Where chairPoster bed

Read the chant

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 122: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Picture coatBall herethereCheck vocab: what and whereModel sentence: Where’s the book?-It’s here/there. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.- Model: Call someone to practice in front of the whole class. Practice in group. Allocate the parts of the characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.- Call on some groups to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments.- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.3 Let’s TalkAsk students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pair to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house.. Call some pairs to act outCorrect their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look and find out the model sentences

Point the pictures and practise

Pactise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 21Period 84: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK?

Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 123: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils to ask and answer a bout he specific information.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up

Ask and answer about Ss’ name and spell it4. Listen and tick

- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page19 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5. Read and complete- Have pupils open their books to Page 19. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying mention the distance between the hand and the thing in picture.- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the given words in sentences 1, 2, 3 and 4.- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments.Answers: 1. Here 2. There 3. Here 4. there- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text.Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.

6. Let’s sing

Greeting

Indentify the characters in each picture

Listen and tick

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work individually

Work in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 124: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Introduce the The poster and the ball song, Page 19. - Play the recording and listen the How are you? song- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm.- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation.

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the contain of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Listen and sing

Do exercises in the Workbook

WEEK: 22Period 85: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK?

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about the location of things in the house (plural).2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Where are the posters? –They are under my bed.- Vocabulary: near, under, on, behind, look inII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 125: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the poster and the ball song

2. Look, Listen and repeat.Have Ss to look at the book at page 20.Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying.Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubblesPlay the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times.Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Peter’s part and the other repeat his mother’s part.Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation.- Teach vocabulary:

Near underOn behindlook in preposition(prep)Check vocab: slap the board- Elicits the structures

Where are the posters? –They are under my bed.2. Point and sayHave Ss look at the pictures on page 20Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.T models/ allocates the parts of characters Quan and Linda to Ss use structure:

Where are the posters? –They are under my bed.Ask them to act out the model dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue point and use the information in picture a, b, c and d in pairs. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments.

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Read in pairs

Look at 4 pictures

Point to the pictures and practise

Practice in pairsPlay role and speak out.

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 126: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.

3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task.Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house.- Display in class, others commentListen and correct.Have Ps practise 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Work in pair practice talking:

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 22Period 86: UNIT 3: WHERE’S MY BOOK?

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house (plural) 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: bed, ballII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house

4. Listen and number- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 21

Practise in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 127: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes.- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5. Read and completeAsk Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 21.Set the scene: “you are going to read and questions the paragraph about phong’s room and find out the answer.”Have a revision of the language:Ask Ss to read the dialogues and answer. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: 1. It is on the bed. 2, They are under the bed 3, They are near the desk. 4, They are on the desk. 5, They are on the wall

6. Write about your bedroom- Explain how to do the exercise

T introduces the topic “you are going to write the paragraph about their houses”Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise.

Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen

and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and number

Ps answer

Look at the picture

Work In pairsRead the dialogues in pairs

Work individually

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 128: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

the sentences.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 22

Period 87 UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK?Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house. Pronounce the sounds in the letters / /, / / correctly .2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house1. Listen and repeatPlay the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role.Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words chair and where-Introduce the sounds / / and / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 129: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer.+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation.2. Listen and write- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction.- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.Answer: 3. Let’s chant- Introduce the Chant.- Turn on the tape.- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.- Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action.- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look at 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 88: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK?Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 130: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house 3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: read chant.

4. Read and tick.T explains the situation and how to do the exercise-Ask students to read the paragraph and choose the suitable picture. Work in groups to do the exercise then explain how to choose the picture in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark.

Correct the pronunciationAsk some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension

of the reading text Answers: picture c.

5.Read and writeT introduces the topic “you are going to read the

sentences and find the suitable words to fill in the blanks”.Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise.

Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen

and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of

the sentences. 6. Project- Introduce the situation.- Explain how to do the exercise: draw your bedroom and describe it to your classmates

- Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment.- Correct Ss’ mistakes and pronunciation4.Consolidation

Read chant

Look at the sentences in the book

Read and Work individually

Work individually

Fill the suitable words in the blanks

Work individually

Work individually

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 131: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Summary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

WEEK 23Period 89: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about things in the room.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Are there any posters in the room? - Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t- Vocabulary: any, map, sofa, wardrobe, cupboardII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe their houses.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: read the chant

1. Look, listen and repeat.Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 24 and what they are saying.

Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and Mai ask and answer questions about things in the room.Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.Call on one pair. One repeats Linda’s part, the other repeats Mai’s part.Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation.

2. Point and say- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 24. Elicit the

Read the chant

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 132: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary:Any mapSofa wardrobecupboardCheck vocab: what and whereModel sentence: Are there any posters in the room? - Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments.- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.3 Let’s TalkAsk students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about things in the room. Call some pairs to act outCorrect their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look and find out the model sentences

Point the pictures and practise

Pactise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 23Period 90: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?

Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about things in the room.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 133: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up: ask and answer questions about things in the room.

4. Listen and tick- Have pupils look at pictures 1 and 2 on page 25 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5. Look, read and write- Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what are there in the picture.- Tell Ss that they are going to read the sentences and write the missing words to fill in the blanks.- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments.Answers: 2. Cupboard 3. Map 4. chairs- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text.Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.

6. Let’s write

Practise in pairs

Indentify the characters in each picture

Listen and tick

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 134: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to read the questions and use the real things in their houses to answer them.- Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the questions- Ss read silently and answer questions.- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments.

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Answer the questions

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK: 23Period 91: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity of things.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: How many chairs are there? - There are six.- Vocabulary: How many, cup, fan, mirror, door, window, countII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to greet to each other3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song Sing the song

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 135: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

1.Look, Listen and repeat.Have Ss to look at the book at page 26.Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying.

Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubblesPlay the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times.Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Peter’s part and the other repeat Nam’s part.Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation.- Teach vocabulary:

How many cupFan mirrorDoor windowcount- Elicits the structures How many chairs are there? - There are six

2. Point and sayHave Ss look at the pictures on page 26Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy and the girl to SsAsk them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures.Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments.Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.

3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task.Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions about quantity of things.

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Read in pairs

Look at 4 pictures

Point to the pictures and practise

Play role and speak out.

Work in pair practice

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 136: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Display in class, others commentListen and correct.Have Ps practise 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

talking:

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 23Period 92: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity of things.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about quantity of things.

4. Listen and number- Have pupils look at picture on page 27 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the picture and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they

Practise in pairs

Look at the pictures in the book

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 137: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

are going to listen to the recording and number the things they listen to. They should number the things.- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the things. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5.Read and writeAsk Ss to read the paragraph and find out the information to answer the questions.Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to answer the questions”Have a revision of the language.Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: 1. There is one door.

2. There are two windows.3. There are eight chairs.4. There are four pictures.5. There are two fans.

6. Let’s play- Introduce the game Spot the difference to pupils.- Explain how the game is played. Pupils find out the difference things in the pictures - Pupils play the game then report in front of the class. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary.- When the time is up, call on some Ss to demonstrate the game at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments.- Correct the mistake and pronunciation if necessary.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework

Listen and number

Ps answer

Look at 3 pictures

Work Individually

Read the paragraph, ask and answer questions in pairs

Work individually

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 138: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 24Period 93: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?

Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about quantity of things, things in the room. Pronounce the sounds in the letters / /, / / correctly.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about quantity of things.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to describe their rooms1. Listen and repeatPlay the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role.Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words fan and cup-Introduce the sounds / / and / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer.+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation.2. Listen and write- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the

Ask ps to practice

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 139: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction.- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.Answer: 3. Let’s chant- Introduce the Chant.- Turn on the tape.- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.- Ps chant in group and individual. - Ps chant and do the action.- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look at 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 24Period 94: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?

Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about quantity of things, things in the room 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 140: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe their rooms.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant

4. Read and circle.T introduces the topic “you are going to read the

sentences and choose the best answer”.Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task

Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen

and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of

the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus

to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: 1. Are; 2. is; 3. lamps; 4. Chairs; 5. on

5. Read and write-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise-Ask students to look at the picture and identify the things in the room. Read the paragraph in the book and fill the suitable words to complete the paragraph. Work individually to do the exercise then report in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. is 2. chairs 3. T.V 4. pictures 6. Project- Introduce the situation.- Explain how to do the exercise: Interview their friends and complete the table using the structure:How many … are there? – There are/ There is….-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Read the chant

Look at the sentences in the bookRead and Work individually

Work in pairs

Fill the suitable words in the blanks

Work in group

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 141: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 24Period 95: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify toys.2. Skills:- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Do you have a doll?-Yes, I do. / - No, I don’t- Vocabulary: have, teddy bear, doll, car, puzzle, robotII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe things in the room.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant1. Look, listen and repeat.Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 30 and what they are saying.Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and Linda identifying toys.Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other repeats Linda’s part.Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation.

2. Point and say- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 30. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary:Have teddy bearDoll carPuzzle robotcheck vocab: what and whereModel sentence: Do you have a doll? -Yes, I do. / - No, I don’t.

Read the chant

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look and find out the model sentences

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 142: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai, Quan and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments.- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.3. Let’s TalkAsk students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to identify toys. Call some pairs to act outCorrect their pronunciation and mistake.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Point the pictures and practise

Practise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 96: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify toys.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 143: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

3. New lesson:Teacher’s actions Students’ actions

Warm – Identify toys. 4. Listen and number

- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 31 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and number the pictures they hear. Guess the answer- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5. Read and write- Have pupils open their books to Page 31. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are.Teach vocabulary:Shelf pretty- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in paragraph.- Ss read silently and complete the paragraph.- Ss trade their answers for correction- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments.Answers: 1. Car 2. Ball 3. Doll 4. Do 5. they- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text.Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.

6. Let’s write- Have pupils open their books to Page 31. Get Ss to read the questions and use the real toys they have to answer.- Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the questions about the toys.- Ss read silently and answer questions.- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction

Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments.

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.

Pairs work

Indentify the characters in each picture

Listen and number

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work individually

Listen and sing

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 144: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK: 25Period 97: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about toys.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Does your brother have a robot? - Yes, he does/ No, he doesn’t.- Vocabulary: yo-yo, ship, plane, kiteII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to talk about toys3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Jumped letters

1. Look, Listen and repeat.Have Ss to look at the book at page 32.Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying.

Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrasesHave Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubblesPlay the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times.

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 145: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Linda’s part.Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation.- Teach vocabulary:yo-yo shipplane kite Check vocab: slap the board- Elicits the structures

Does your brother have a robot? - Yes, he does/ No, he doesn’t.2. Point and sayHave Ss look at the pictures on page 32Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai, Quan and Nam to SsAsk them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures.Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments.Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.

3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task.Have Ps work in pair ask and answer question about toys.- Display in class, others commentListen and correct.Have Ps practise 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Read in pairs

Look at 4 pictures

Point to the pictures and practise

Play role and speak out.

Work in pairs practice talking:

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 146: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 25Period 98: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about toys.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting: talk about the toys Ss have.

4. Listen and tick- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 33 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick True or False. Ss guess to tick the p pictures True or False the boxes.- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5.Read and writeAsk Ss to identify the characters in the picture on

Practise in pairs

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and number

Ps answer

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 147: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

page 33.Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to answer the questions about Phong’s toys.”Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the paragraph. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: 1. He has a robot.

2. She has a teddy bear.3. Yes, he does.4. She has a yo-yo and a puzzle.5. No, he doesn’t.

6. Let’s sing- Introduce The Linda has a little doll song, Page 33. - Play the recording and listen to The song- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm.- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look at 3 pictures

Work In pair to ask and answer the questions

Sing the song

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 148: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 25

Period 99: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify toys, and ask and answer questions about toys. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /pl/, / / correctly.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the song Linda has a little doll1. Listen and repeatPlay the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role.Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words plane and ship-Introduce the sounds /pl/ and / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer.+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation.2. Listen and write- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look at 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 149: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction.- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.Answer: 3. Let’s chant- Introduce the Chant.- Turn on the tape.- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.- Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action.- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 25Period 100: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?

Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify toys, ask and answer questions about the toys.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about the toys.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the song: Linda has a little doll. Sing the song

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 150: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

4. Read and complete.T introduces the topic “you are going to read the

paragraph to get the information in order to fill the words given to the blanks”. Ss look at the picture and find out the situation and the toys in the pictureSs read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task

Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen

and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of

the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus

to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: 1. toys; 2. orange; 3. two; 4. ship; 5. green

5. Write about you- Have pupils open their books to Page 35. Tell pupils that they are going to read and use the real information about themselves to write the sentences about their toys.- Pupils practice in pairs and complete the sentences.- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.- Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text.- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Project- Introduce the situation.- Explain how to do the exercise: make a paper toy and ask, answer questions about toys-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look at the picture in the book

Read and Work individually

Work in pairs

Fill the suitable words in the blanks

Work in pairs

Pairs work

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 151: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 26Date of preparing:Date of teaching:

Period 101: REVIEW 3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:- Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from units 11-15, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Revisions.- Vocabulary: Revisions.II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:-Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit11 to unit 151. Listen and tick- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on page 36 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – b; 4 – a. 2. Listen and number- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 36

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Give the identification

Listen and tick

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 152: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. Guess the answer- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.Answer: 1. 2. 3. 4.3. Read and complete-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise-Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. house 2. bedrooms 3. bathroom 4. small 5. There 5. They 4. Read and match- Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 37. Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the sentences to the sentences.- Pupils read the sentences individually and do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary.- Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for correction.- Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments.- Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences.- Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.Answer: 1.c 2. a 3. d 4.b

5. Look and sayHave pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3 and4 on Page 37.

Work individually

Listen and tick

Work individually

Work in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 153: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters in the pictures to the pupils. Ask them to ask and answer. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.- Call on some pairs to perform their task in front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments.- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Pair works

Do exercises in the workbook

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

Period 102: SHORT STORYI. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:- Review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 11 - 15.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening, writing and reading skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Revisions.- Vocabulary: Revisions.- Phonic: RevisionsII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Do the exercises. Correct exercise.3. New lesson: Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit 11 to unit 15

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 154: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

1. Read the story. Put these lines in the correct bubbles. Then listen and check.- Read the sentences given and read the story about Cat and Mouse 3- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 on page 38 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Ss read and find out the suitable sentences to fill in the blanks and explain how to do the exercise.Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and check their answers- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen. Check their guess.- Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the story- Play the recording again pupils listen to the story and check Ss’ answersAnswer: 1. Who is Mimi? 2. How many brothers and sisters do you have? 3. Where are they? 4. How many rooms are there in your house?2. Correct the answer-Ask students to read the story in the book and read the sentences given to find out the mistake and correct the false sentences. Work individually to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. No, he has two sister. 2. No, he has a brother. 3. No, he is Jack. 4. There are eight rooms. 3. Unscramble these words from the conversationHave Ps work individually. Read the story again and order the letters to make the meaningful words. Have pupils trade their answers for correction.- Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments..- Have the whole class read each word in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.Answer: a. sister b. brother c. house

Read the sentences

Give the identificationWork in pairs

Listen and answer T’s questions

Work in pairs

Work in group

Pair work

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 155: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

d. rooms e. hello f. mouse4. Complete the conversation between Miu

and Mimi- Pairs work. Have pupils turn their books to page 39. Tell pupils that they are going to read the dialogue between Miu and Mimi and find out the suitable words to complete the meaningful dialogue.- Pupils do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary.- Have pupils trade their answers for correction.- Call on some pairs to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments.- Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences.- Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.Answer: Miu: Name/is

Mimi: name Miu: to meet you Mimi: Nice to meet you

4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 11 - 15.

Read and do exercise in pairs.

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 26Period 105: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS.

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about pets.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Do you have any pets?–Yes, I do. I have… /No, I don’t. I have….- Vocabulary: dog, pet, cute, cat, parrot, rabbit, goldfishII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 156: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils answer T’s questions.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting 1.Look, listen and repeat.Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 6 and what they are saying.Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam, Quan and Mai ask and answer questions about pets.Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.Call on one pair. One repeats Nam’s part, the others repeat Mai’s, Quan’s part.Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation.

2. Point and say- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 40. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary:Dog petCute catParrot rabbitgoldfishCheck vocab: slap the boardModel sentence: Do you have any pets? –Yes, I do. I have… /No, I don’t. I have…. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments.- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.3 Let’s TalkAsk students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask

Pair works

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look and find out the model sentences

Point the pictures and practise

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 157: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about toys. Call some pairs to act outCorrect their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Pactise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 27Period 106: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS?

Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer about pets.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: in the cage, in the fish tankII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer about pets.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up

Jumped words 4. Listen and tick

- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 41 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.

Work individually

Indentify the characters in each picture

Listen and tick

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 158: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5. Look and write- Have pupils open their books to Page 41. Get Ss to identify the characters in the picture and who they are in the picture.Teach vocabulary:In the cage in the fish tankPet shop birdCheck vocab: what and where- Tell Ss that they are going look the picture and read the paragraph to get information, find out the suitable words to write in the blanks.- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.- Ss trade their answers for correction- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments.Answers: 1. Dog 2. cats 3. Birds 5. Goldfish- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text.Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.

6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 41. Get Ss to write the answers about the pets they have- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments and reinforce their pronunciation.

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work individually

Write the answer individually

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 159: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK: 27Period 107: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS?

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able ask and answer questions about the location of pets2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Where are the cats? – They are under the table.- Vocabulary: over there, with, in the garden, flower pot, fish tankII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss write the new words3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting about the pets

1. Look, Listen and repeat.Have Ss to look at the book at page 42.Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying.

Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrasesHave Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubblesPlay the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times.Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Nam’s part and the other repeat his mother’s part.Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation.- Teach vocabulary:

over there within the garden flower potfish tankCheck vocab: rub out and remember

Pairs work

Look at the pictures in the bookListen and repeat

Read in pairs

Look at 4 pictures

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 160: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Elicits the structures Where are the cats? – They are under the table.2. Point and sayHave Ss look at the pictures on page 42Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy and the girl to SsAsk them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures.Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments.Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.

3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Talk about the location of pets.Have Ps work in pair.- Display in class, others commentListen and correct.Have Ps practise 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Point to the pictures and practise

Play role and speak out.

Work in pair practice talking:

Do the exercise in the wwwwworkbookDo exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 161: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 27Period 108: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about the location of pets.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: picture, years oldII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Talk about the location of pets.

4. Listen and number- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 43 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and number the pictures they hear. They should guess the answer.- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5.Read and completeAsk Ss to open the book on page 9.Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to fill the missing words about the pets and the location of the pets.

Practise in pairs

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and number

Ps answer

Look at 3 pictures

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 162: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.)Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: 1. Pets 2. Cat/on 3. Dog/ under 4. parrots/ rabbit/ garden

6. Let’s sing- Introduce Do you have any pets song, Page 43. - Play the recording and listen to the song- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm.- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Work Individually

Read the paragraph

Sing the song

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 28Period 109: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS?

Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about pets and the location of pets. Pronounce the sounds in the letters / /, / / correctly .2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 163: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about the location of pets they have.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the song: Do you have any pets?1. Listen and repeatPlay the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role.Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words dog and parrot-Introduce the sounds / / and / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer.+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation.2. Listen and write- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction.- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.Answer: 3. Let’s chant- Introduce the Chant.

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look at 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Ps listen to the tape and

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 164: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Turn on the tape.- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.- Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action.- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

chant

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 110: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS?Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about pets and the location of pets.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils identify family members, talk about the ages of family members.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant

4. Read and match.T introduces the topic “you are going to read the

questions to get the information in order to match the answers”.Ss read the sentences individually and check their

Read the chant

Look at the sentences in the book

Read and Work

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 165: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.)

Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen

and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of

the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus

to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – b.

5. Read and write-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise-Ask students to look the picture of Mai’s pets. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 45.Read the paragraph and questions in the book and write the answers. Work individually to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. She is 8 years old 2. Yes, she does.

3.She has a dog, Two goldfish and two parrots. 4.It’s at the door.5.They are in the fish tank

6. Project- Introduce the situation.- Explain how to do the exercise: draw their pets. Tell the classmates about it-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

individually

Work in pairs

Answer the questions

Work individually

Vb89Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 166: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 28Period 111: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE?

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about toys2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: What toys do you like? - I like ships- Vocabulary: ship, truck, kite, plane, trainII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant1. Look, listen and repeat.Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 46 and what they are saying.Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam and Mai ask and answer questions about toys.Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.Call on one pair. One repeats Nam’s part, the other repeats Mai’s part.Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation.

2. Point and say- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary:Ship truckKite planetraincheck vocab: slap the boardModel sentence: What toys do you like

Read the chant

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look and find out the

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 167: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- I like ships. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments.- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.3 Let’s TalkAsk students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about toys. Call some pairs to act outCorrect their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

model sentences

Point the pictures and practise

Pactise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 112: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE?Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about toys.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: way, clean, early, in the morningII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 168: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up

Talk about toys 4. Listen and tick

- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 47 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5. Read and write- Have pupils open their books to Page 47. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying.- Tell Ss that they are going to look the pictures, read and get information to write the missing words in the sentences.- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.- Ss trade their answers for correction- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments.Answers: 1. playroom 2. planes

3. dolls 4. ships 5. kites 6. trucks

- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text.Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.

6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 47. Get Ss to write the answers about the toys they have- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class.

Ss practise

Indentify the characters in each picture

Listen and tick

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work individually

Listen and sing

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 169: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

The rest of the class listen and give comments and reinforce their pronunciation

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK: 29Period 113: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU HAVE?

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: How many parrots do you have?- I have five parrots - Vocabulary:II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to talk about their toys they have3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting about toys

1.Look, Listen and repeatHave Ss to look at the book at page 48.Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying.

Set the scene: we are going to learn new phraseHave Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles

Pairs work

Look at the pictures in the book

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 170: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times.Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Quan’s part.Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation.- Elicits the structures

How many parrots do you have?- I have 5 parrots.2. Point and sayHave Ss look at the pictures on page 48Elicit the characters in the pictures and guess what are they talking about. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boys and the girl to SsAsk them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures.Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments.Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.

3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task.Have Ps work in pair to talk about quantity- Display in class, others commentListen and correct.Have Ps practise 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Listen and repeat

Read in pairs

Look at 4 pictures

Point to the pictures and practise

Play role and speak out.

Work in pair practice talking:

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 171: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 29Period: 114: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU HAVE?

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: differentII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students’ attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about the toys they have.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: guessing games

4. Listen and number- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 49 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes.- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5.Read and completeAsk Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 49.Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph about children’s toys to get the information in order

Group works

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and number

Ps answer

Look at 4 pictures

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 172: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

to fill the suitable words in the blanks.” Teach vocabulary: DifferentHave a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the paragraph about children’s toys and fill the suitable words in the blanks.Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: 1. Dogs/ parrots; 2. Cats/ dog; 3. goldfish

6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 49. Get Ss to write the answers about the toys and the quantity of toys they have- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments and reinforce their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Work Individually

Read the paragraph and do the exercise

Practise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 29Period: 115: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE?

Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about toys and quantity. Pronounce the sounds in the letters Kite/ai/,/e/ ship /i/ correctly.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: behindII. Teaching aids:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 173: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students’ attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about toys.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chain game1. Listen and repeatPlay the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role.Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words kite and ship-Introduce the sounds i/ai/ e / /and ship / i / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer.+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation.2. Listen and write- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction.- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.Answer: 3. Let’s chant- Introduce the Chant.- Turn on the tape.- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.- Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action.

Group work

Listen and repeat

Look at 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 174: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 29Period 116: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE?

Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about toys and quantity.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about their house facilities.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant.

4. Read and match.T introduces the topic “you are going to read the

paragraph to get the information in order to match the suitable questions to the answers

Read the questions and answers individually then matching. Ss do the task

Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen

and comment.

Read the chant

Read the paragraph in the book

Read and Work individually

Work in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 175: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences.

Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation

Answers: 1. c; 2. a; 3. d; 4. b.5. Read and complete

-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise-Ask students to read the paragraph in the book of page 51 and answer the questions.Work individually to find out the suitable words to fill in the blanks then give the answer in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. trucks. 2. ten. 3. has. 4. cats. 5. How 6. Project- Introduce the situation.- Explain how to do the exercise: Draw and colour the toys and the pets they have. -Ss introduce their toys and their pets in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Read the paragraph and answer the questions indindividually

Work individually

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 30Period 117: UNIT 13: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress.2. Skills:- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: What are you doing?- I am reading.- Vocabulary: doing, reading, cooking, listening to music, cleaning the floorII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 176: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about toys they have.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant

1. Look, listen and repeat.Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 52 and what they are saying.

Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam and Hoa ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress.Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.Call on one pair. One repeats Nam’s part, the other repeats Hoa’s part.Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation.

2. Point and say- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 52. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary:Doing readingCooking listening to musiccleaning the floorCheck vocab: what and whereModel sentence: What are you doing? - I am reading. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.- Model: Call pairs to practice in front of the whole class. Practice in pairs. Allocate the parts of the characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.- Call on some groups to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments.- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.

Read the chant

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look and find out the model sentences

Point the pictures and practise

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 177: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

3 Let’s TalkAsk students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pair to ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress. Call some pairs to act outCorrect their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Pactise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 30

Period 118: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils to write the new words.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up

Ask and answer about one’s action in progress4. Listen and tick

- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 53 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the

Pairs work

Indentify the characters in each picture

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 178: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

pictures they hear. Guess the answer- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5. Read and write- Have pupils open their books to Page 53. Explain the situation and how to do exercise. Ss are going to read the paragraph about Mai’s family’s action in progress- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the answers for questions What are they doing?- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments.Answers: 1. reading 2. Is listening to music 3. are cooking- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text.Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.

6. Let’s write- Explain how to do the exercise

T introduces the topic “you are going to write the answers for the questions about your action in progress”Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise.

Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen

and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the

sentences.4.Consolidation

Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Listen and tick

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work individually

Work in pairs

Listen and sing

Do exercises in the Workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 179: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK: 30Period 119: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone’s action in progress.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: What’s he doing? – He’s doing his homework.- Vocabulary: singing, drawing, playing the piano, watching TV, doing one’s homeworkII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: talk about Ss’ (in class) action in progress

1. Look, Listen and repeat.Have Ss to look at the book at page 54.Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying.Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubblesPlay the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times.Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Linda’s part and the other repeat his father’s part.Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation.- Teach vocabulary:

Individually work

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Read in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 180: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Singing drawingplaying the piano watching TVdoing one’s homeworkCheck vocab: Rub out and remember- Elicits the structures

What’s he doing? – He’s doing his homework.2. Point and sayHave Ss look at the pictures on page 54Elicit the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy and the girl to Ss use structure:

What’s he doing? – He’s doing his homework.Ask them to act out the model dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue point and use the information in picture a, b, c and d in pairs. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments.Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.

3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task.Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions about someone’s action in progress.- Display in class, others commentListen and correct.Have Ps practise 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Look at 4 pictures

Point to the pictures and practise

Practice in pairsPlay role and speak out.

Work in pair practice talking:

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 181: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 30Period 120: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about someone’s action in progress. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: skatingII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: ask and answer questions about the someone’s action in progress.

4. Listen and number- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 55 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes.- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5. Read and matchExplain how to do exercise on page 55.Set the scene: “you are going to read and questions and match the suitable answer.”

Practise in pairs

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and number

Ps answer

Look at the picture

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 182: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Have a revision of the language:Ask Ss to read the dialogues and answer. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some pairs to report their answers. Others listen and comment.Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: 1. b 2.d 3.a 4.c

6. Let’s sing- Introduce the I love my parents song, Page 55. - Play the recording and listen the song- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm.- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Work in pairsRead the questions and answers in pairs

Sing the song

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 31Period 121: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?

Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s and someone’s action in progress. Pronounce the sounds in the letters ea/ i: /, aw / / correctly .2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 183: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone’s action in progress.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: sing I love my parents song1. Listen and repeatPlay the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role.Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words reading and drawing-Introduce the sounds ea/ i: / and aw / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer.+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation.2. Listen and write- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction.- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.Answer: 3. Let’s chant- Introduce the Chant.- Turn on the tape.- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.- Ps chant in group and individual.

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Read 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 184: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

-The Ps chant and do the action.- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 122: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s and someone’s action in progress. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone’s action 3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant.

4. Read and complete.T explains the situation and how to do the exercise-Ask students to read the paragraph and choose the suitable words to fill in the blanks. Work individually to do the exercise then explain how to choose the words given to fill in the blanks in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark.

Correct the pronunciation

Read the chant

Look at the sentences in the book

Read and Work individually

Work individually

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 185: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the reading text

Answers: 1. is. 2. In 3. Watching 4. playing 5. listening

5. Let’s writeT introduces the topic “you are going to read the

paragraph about Quan’s family the questions and write the answers”.Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise.

Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen

and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of

the sentences.Answer: 1. His family is at home.

2. He is watching TV.3. She is playing the piano.4. He is listening to music.5. He is singing.

6. Project- Introduce the situation. Ask Ss observe the pictures and talk about what children are doing.- Explain how to do the exercise: tell your classmates what they are doing.

- Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment.- Correct Ss’ mistakes and pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Fill the suitable words in the blanks

Work individually

Work individually

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 31Period 123: UNIT 19: THEY ARE IN THE PARK.

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about activities in the park.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 186: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: What are they doing? - They are skating.- Vocabulary: in the park, skating, cycling, skating, flying kites, skippingII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe their houses.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: read the chant

1.Look, listen and repeat.Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 58 and what they are saying.

Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam, Mrs Lan and Mai ask and answer questions about things in the room.Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.Call on someone. One repeats Nam’s part, the others repeat Mai’s part, and Mrs Lan’s partHave whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation.

2. Point and say- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 58. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary:in the park skatingcycling flying kitesskippingCheck vocab: what and whereModel sentence: What are they doing? - They are skating. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Linda to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation

Read the chant

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look and find out the model sentences

Point the pictures and practise

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 187: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

of sounds, intonation) when necessary.- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments.- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.3 Let’s TalkAsk students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about activities in the park. Call some pairs to act outCorrect their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Pactise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 31Period 124: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK.

Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about activities in the park.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: sports, games, football, happy, todayII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up: ask and answer questions about activities in the park.

4. Listen and tick

Practise in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 188: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Have pupils look at pictures 1a, b and 2a, b on page 59 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5. Read and write- Have pupils open their books to Page 59. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are doing.- Teach vocabulary:Sports gamesFootball happyToday- Check vocabulary: what and where- Tell Ss that they are going to read the paragraph and write the missing words to fill in the sentences.- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.- Ss trade their answers for correction- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments.Answers: 1. In the park 2. Playing football 3. skipping 4. Is cycling 5. flying kites- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text.Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.

6. Let’s write- Have pupils open their books to Page 59. Get Ss to read the questions and use the real information about yourself to answer them.- Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the questions- Ss read silently and answer questions.- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The

Indentify the characters in each picture

Listen and tick

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work individually

Answer the questions

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 189: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

others listen and give comments.4.Consolidation

Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK: 32Period 125: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK.

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about the weather in different places.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: What’s the weather like in Ho Chi Minh city? – It’s sunny.- Vocabulary: weather, like, great, sunny, rainy, cloudy, windy, snowy, stormyII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to greet to each other3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song

1.Look, Listen and repeat.Have Ss to look at the book at page 60.Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying.

Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubblesPlay the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 190: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

the speech bubbles two times.Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Linda’s part and the other repeat Mai’s part.Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation.- Teach vocabulary:

Weather likeGreat sunnyRainy cloudyWindy snowyStormyCheck vocab: slap the board- Elicits the structures

What’s the weather like in Ho Chi Minh city? – It’s sunny.2. Point and sayHave Ss look at the pictures on page 60Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy and the girl to SsAsk them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures.Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments.Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.

3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task.Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions about the weather in different places.- Display in class, others commentListen and correct.Have Ps practise 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson

Listen and repeat

Read in pairs

Look at 4 pictures

Point to the pictures and practise

Play role and speak out.

Work in pair practice talking:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 191: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 31Period 126: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK.

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about the weather in different places.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting- T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about the weather in different places.

4. Listen and number- Have pupils look at picture on page 61 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the picture and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and number the things they listen to. They should number the things.- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the things. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.

Practise in pairs

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and number

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 192: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5. Look, read and writeAsk Ss to read the questions and observe the picture find out the information to answer the questions.Set the scene: “you are going to read the question and observe the pictures in order to answer the questions”Have a revision of the language.Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: 1. cloudy 2. Windy 3. Rainy 4. sunny

6. Let’s sing- Introduce The weather song, Page 61. - Play the recording and listen to The song- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm.- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Ps answer

Look at 3 pictures

Work Individually

Read the question then answer it using the cues in the pictures

Sing the song

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 193: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 32Period 127: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK.

Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about activities in the park and the weather in different places. Pronounce the sounds in the letters ai/ /, a-e/ / correctly.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about the weather in different places.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant1. Listen and repeatPlay the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role.Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words rainy and skate-Introduce the sounds ai/ / and a-e/ / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer.+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation.2. Listen and write- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.

Read the chant

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look at 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 194: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction.- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.Answer: 3. Let’s chant- Introduce the Chant.- Turn on the tape.- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.- Ps chant in group and individual. - Ps chant and do the action.- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 32Period 128: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK.

Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about activities in the park and the weather in different places. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe their rooms.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 195: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Warm up: Read the chant4. Read and match.

T introduces the topic “you are going to read the questions to match the suitable answers”.Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task

Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some pairs to report their answers and

explain how to choose the answers. Others listen and comment.

Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences.

Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation

Answers: 1. c; 2. d; 3. b; 4. e; 5. a5. Read and complete

-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise-Ask students to read the paragraph in the book and fill the words given to complete the paragraph. Work individually to do the exercise then report in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. weather 2. park 3. flying 4. playing 5. skating 6. Project- Introduce the situation.- Explain how to do the exercise: Draw and color a weather icon for tomorrow’s weather in S’s place.-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Read the chant

Look at the sentences in the bookRead and Work individually

Work in pairs

Fill the suitable words in the blanks

Work individually

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 196: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 33Period 129: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA?

Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer about places.2. Skills:- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Where’s Sa Pa?- It’s in north Vietnam- Vocabulary: north, south, central, beautifulII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about the weather.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant1. Look, listen and repeat.Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 64 and what they are saying.Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and Linda ask and answer questions about places”.Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other repeats Linda’s part.Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation.

2. Point and say- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 64. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary:North southCentral beautiful check vocab: what and whereModel sentence: Where’s Sa Pa? - It’s in north Vietnam

Read the chant

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Look and find out the model sentences

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 197: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Quan to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments.- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.3. Let’s TalkAsk students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs ask and answer questions about places. Call some pairs to act outCorrect their pronunciation and mistake.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Point the pictures and practise

Practise in pairs

Do exercises in the workbook

Period 130: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA?Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6

I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about places.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 198: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actionsWarm up – Ask and answer questions about places.

4. Listen and number- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, and 3 on page 65 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and number the pictures they hear. Guess the answer- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5. Read and write- Have pupils open their books to Page 65. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are.Teach vocabulary:city Ha long bayplace townvillage bridgemarket- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in sentences.- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.- Ss trade their answers for correction- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments.Answers: 1. Thang Long bridge/north Vietnam 2. Ben Thanh market/south Vietnam- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text.Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.

6. Let’s write- Have pupils open their books to Page 65. Get Ss to read the questions and use the real information about their places to answer.- Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the questions about their places.

Pairs work

Indentify the characters in each picture

Listen and number

Indentify the characters in each picture

Work individually

Listen and sing

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 199: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Ss read silently and answer questions.- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction

Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments.

4.ConsolidationAsking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. 5. HomeworkDo exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK: 33Period 131: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA?

Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about distance.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Is Hai Duong near Ha noi? –Yes, it is/No, It isn’t.- Vocabulary: near, far from, far, distanceII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:- Ask Ss to talk about toys3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Jumped letters

6. Look, Listen and repeat.Have Ss to look at the book at page 66.Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are

Look at the pictures in the book

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 200: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrasesHave Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubblesPlay the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times.Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Tony’s part and the other repeat Linda’s part.Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation.- Teach vocabulary:Near far fromFar distance Check vocab: slap the board- Elicits the structures

Is Hai Duong near Ha noi? –Yes, it is/No, It isn’t.2. Point and sayHave Ss look at the pictures on page 66Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.T models/ allocates the parts of characters of the children to SsAsk them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures.Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments.Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.

3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task.Have Ps work in pair ask and answer question about distance.- Display in class, others commentListen and correct.Have Ps practise

Listen and repeat

Read in pairs

Look at 4 pictures

Point to the pictures and practise

Play role and speak out.

Work in pairs practice talking:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 201: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 33Period 132: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA?

Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about distance.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting: talk about the distance.

4. Listen and tick- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 67 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick True or False. Ss guess to tick the p pictures True or False the boxes.- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.

Practise in pairs

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and number

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 202: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.

5. Read and completeAsk Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 67.Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information about Nam’s places in order to fill the suitable words in the blanks”Teach vocab:Theater nowTemple lakeMuseum water puppet theater- Check vocab: Slap the boardHave a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the paragraph. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: 1. Name 2. Near 3. Theater 4. far

6. Let’s play- Explain how the game is played: pupils play in pairs. - When the time is up, call on pairs to demonstrate the game at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments.- Have the whole class repeat all the sentences to reinforce their pronunciation.Follow up:- Have pupils brainstorm and spell their names of their classmates / friends.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Ps answer

Look at 3 pictures

Work In pair to ask and answer the questions

Play game

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 203: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

WEEK 34Period 133: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA?

Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify and ask and answer questions about places and distance. Pronounce the sounds in the letters ar/ /, or/ / correctly.2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the song Linda has a little doll1. Listen and repeatPlay the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role.Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words far and north-Introduce the sounds ar / / and or / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer.+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation.2. Listen and write- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.

Sing the song

Look at the pictures in the book

Listen and repeat

Read at 2 sentences

Listen and fill in the blank

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 204: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction.- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.Answer: 3. Let’s chant- Introduce the Chant “ Where’s Ba Vi?”.- Turn on the tape.- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.- Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action.- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Ps listen to the tape and chant

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 34Period 134: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA?

Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about places and distance.2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners:- Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about the toys.3. New lesson

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant: Where’s Ba Vi? Read the chant

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 205: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

4. Read and write.T introduces the topic “you are going to read the

paragraph about A Vung’s family to get the information in order to answer questions”. Ss look at the picture and find out the place in the picture

Teach vocabulary:Mountain tree A lots = a lot of favouriteCheck vocab: rub out and remember

Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task

Monitor the activity and offer help when necessaryHave Ss trade the answers in pairs for correctionCall on some pairs to report their answers. Others

listen and comment.Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of

the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus

to reinforce their pronunciationAnswers: 1. It’s in Sa Pa. 2. He’s eight years old. 3. Sa pa is in north Vietnam. 4. No, it isn’t.

5. Let’s write- Have pupils open their books to Page 69. Tell pupils that they are going to read and use the real information about themselves to write the sentences about the places and distance.- Pupils practice in pairs and complete the sentences.- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.- Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text.- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Project- Introduce the situation.- Explain how to do the exercise: talk about their favourite place-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson

Look at the picture in the book

Read and Work individually

Work in pairs

Fill the suitable words in the blanks

Work in pairs

Pairs work

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 206: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Do exercises in the workbook

WEEK 34Date of preparing:Date of teaching:

Period 135: REVIEW 4I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:- Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from units 16-20, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Revisions.- Vocabulary: Revisions.II. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:-Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook3. New lesson:

Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit 16 to unit 201. Listen and tick- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on page 36 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Give the identification

Listen and tick

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 207: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

of the listening text.Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – b; 4 – a.

2. Listen and number- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 70 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. Guess the answer- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner.- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer:- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text.Answer: 1. 2. 3. 4.3. Read and complete-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise-Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and fill the words given to complete the paragraph. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. Living room 2. reading 3. watching 4. playing 5. near 6. dog 4. Read and match- Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 71. Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the sentences to the sentences.- Pupils read the sentences individually and do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary.- Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for correction.- Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments.- Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences.- Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to

Work individually

Listen and tick

Work individually

Work in pairs

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 208: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

reinforce their pronunciation.Answer: 1.e 2. c 3. a 4. b 5. d

3. Look and sayHave pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3 and 4 on Page 71. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters in the pictures to the pupils. Ask them to ask and answer. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.- Call on some pairs to perform their task in front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments.- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words

Pair works

Do exercises in the workbook

Date of preparing: Date of teaching:

Period 136: SHORT STORY: CAT AND MOUSE 4I. Objectives :1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:- Review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 16 - 20.2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening, writing and reading skills.3. Language focus:- Sentence Partners: Revisions.- Vocabulary: Revisions.- Phonic: RevisionsII. Teaching aids:1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.III. Teaching processes:1. Class organization:- Greeting- Checking for the students' attendance.2. Oral test:

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 209: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

- Do the exercises. Correct exercise.3. New lesson: Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit 16 to unit 201. Read and listen to the story. - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 on page 72 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Ss read to understand the story.- Teach vocabulary:Wait a minute Let’s go for a walkEveryone busyCareful dangerous- Check vocab: what and where

Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and check their answers- Play the recording 2 times, pupils to listen.- Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the story- Play the recording again pupils listen to the story and check Ss’ answers2. Put the words in correct order-Ask students to read the story in the book and read the words given to order them into meaningful sentences. Work individually to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. Let’s go for a walk. 2. Let’s read a book. 3. What are they doing? 4. Nini is listening to music. 3. Match the rhyming wordsHave Ps work individually. Read the words and match the rhyming words. Have pupils trade their answers for correction.- Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments..- Have the whole class read each word in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.Answer: 1. d 2. a 3. e 4. c 5. b

4. Read and write

Ask ps to practice in pairs

Read the storyGive the identification

Listen and answer T’s questions

Work individually

Work individually

Pair work

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/

Page 210: hoc360.net  · Web viewDate of preparing: Date. of teaching: Period 1: Unit 1: HELLO. Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:

HOC360.NET - TÀI LIỆU HỌC TẬP MIỄN PHÍ

Read and find out the suitable words to complete the conversation between Chit and Doris- Pairs work. Have pupils turn their books to page 72. Tell pupils that they are going to read the dialogue between Chit and Doris and find out the suitable words to complete the meaningful dialogue.- Pupils do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary.- Have pupils trade their answers for correction.- Call on some pairs to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments.- Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences.- Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.Answer: 1. Are you 2. Fine 3. like

4. I do 5. I don’t.4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson5.Homework- Do exercises in workbook, review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 16 - 20.

Read and do exercise in pairs.

Do exercises in the workbook

Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/tailieutieuhocvathcs/